Quarterlytics / Technology / Solid State PLC

Solid State PLC

soli · LSE Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker soli
Exchange LSE
Sector Technology
Industry
Employees 201-500
← All annual reports
FY2022 Annual Report · Solid State PLC
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
CONTENTS 

2.    Directors, Secretary and Advisers  

3.    Chairman’s Statement 

7.    Strategic Report 

23.  Corporate and Social Responsibility Report 

27.  Corporate Governance Report 

41.  Audit Committee Report 

46.  Remuneration Committee Report 

59.  Directors’ Report  

63.  Report of the Independent Auditors 

70.  Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income  

71.  Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity 

73.  Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 

74.  Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows  

75.  Notes to the Financial Statements  

120.  Company Statement of Financial Position 

121.  Company Statement of Changes in Equity 

122.  Notes to the Company Financial Statements 

126.  Notice of Annual General Meeting  

0 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONTENTS 

2.    Directors, Secretary and Advisers  

3.    Chairman’s Statement 

6.    Strategic Report 

23.  Corporate and Social Responsibility Report 

27.  Corporate Governance Report 

41.  Audit Committee Report 

46.  Remuneration Committee Report 

59.  Directors’ Report  

63.  Report of the Independent Auditors 

70.  Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income  

71.  Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity 

73.  Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 

74.  Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows  

76.  Notes to the Financial Statements  

119.  Company Statement of Financial Position 

120.  Company Statement of Changes in Equity 

121.  Notes to the Company Financial Statements 

125.  Notice of Annual General Meeting  

1 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS, SECRETARY AND ADVISERS 

Directors:  

Nigel Rogers, Non-Executive Chairman 
Gary Marsh, Chief Executive Officer 
Peter James, BSc FCA, Chief Financial Officer 
John Macmichael, Executive Director 
Matthew Richards, Executive Director 
Peter Magowan, Non-Executive Director  
Peter Haining, FCA, Non-Executive Director 

Company Secretary and  
Registered Office:  

Peter Haining, FCA  
Solid State PLC  
2 Ravensbank Business Park 
Hedera Road, Redditch 
B98 9EY 

Company Number:  

00771335  

Nominated Adviser and   
Broker: 

Joint Broker:  

Auditors:  

Solicitors:  

Bankers:  

Registrars:  

Country of Incorporation 
of Parent Company:  

Legal Form: 

Domicile: 

WH Ireland Limited 
24 Martin Lane 
London EC4R 0DR 

finnCap Limited 
One Bartholomew Close 
London EC1A 7BL 

RSM UK Audit LLP 
St Philips Point, Temple Row 
Birmingham  
West Midlands 
B2 5AF 

Shakespeare Martineau LLP 
1 Colmore Square 
Birmingham 
West Midlands 
B4 6AA 

Lloyds Bank PLC 
125 Colmore Row 
Birmingham 
West Midlands 
B3 3SF 

Neville Registrars Limited 
Neville House 
Steelpark Road 
Halesowen 
B62 8HD 

England and Wales 

Public Limited Company 

United Kingdom 

2 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT 

Introduction 

I  am  pleased  to  report  that  the  Group  has  delivered  another  year  of  record  adjusted  profits  despite  the  supply  chain 
challenges and volatile global markets. We have delivered growth in both revenue and adjusted profits; however, the macro-
economic environment has somewhat curtailed the increase in the period.  

Group  management  continues to make good progress in the implementation of its strategy by investing in people and 
technology,  and  through  the  integration  of  the  two  bolt-on  acquisitions  completed  in  March  2021.  The  acquisitions’ 
performance  and  positive  attitude  to  being  part  of  the  Group  has  surpassed  management’s  expectations  and  have 
enhanced the value we can offer in both our Components and Systems Divisions.  

The Group’s sector diversity continues to provide a resilient business model. Order intake has been strong across all sectors 
including  in  those  markets  which  had  previously  shown  some  weakness  during  the  pandemic,  specifically  energy  and 
aerospace.  This  has  resulted  in  a  record  open  order  book  on  31  May  2022  of  £89.7m,  (comparatives:  31  March  2022: 
£85.5m; 31 March 2021: £41.3m; 31 May 2021: £51.0m). 

The record open order book and strong balance sheet, where we have invested in inventories, provide confidence in our 
ability to continue to deliver growth. Whilst the most volatile period of the supply chain challenge is starting to stabilise, 
component  lead  times  remain  extended,  logistical  delays  are  common  and  inflationary  pressures  are  rising.  These 
challenges are expected to continue through the year ahead into 2023. These are complex issues  that can be difficult to 
navigate and call upon the full range of skills and experience of our highly competent team.   

Having delivered on the five year goal of doubling adjusted diluted EPS to > 60p, the Board is refining its five-year strategic 
plan to 2027. The ambition for the next five years is to replicate or beat historic performance which saw the Group deliver 
>20% CAGR (Compound Annual Growth Rate) in total shareholder return over the five years to 2022. 

Financial overview 

Set out below are the financial key performance indicators which reflect the record year and a very pleasing result: 

KPI 
Reported revenue 
Reported operating profit margin 
Adjusted operating profit margin* 
Reported profit before taxation 
Adjusted profit before taxation* 
Reported EPS 
Adjusted fully diluted EPS  
Adjusted cash flow from operations 
Net cash/(net debt)** 
Dividend 
Open order book @ 31 May  

2022 
£85.0m 
4.4% 
8.7% 
£3.5m 
£7.2m 
29.5p 
70.6p 
£6.0m 
£(5.2)m 
19.5p 
£89.7m 

2021 
£66.3m 
6.5% 
8.3% 
£4.2m 
£5.4m 
46.4p 
54.7p 
£6.9m 
(£4.4m) 
16.0p 
£51.0m 

Change 
+28.2% 
-210bps 
+40bps 
-16.7% 
+33.3% 
-36.4% 
+29.1% 
-13.0% 
-18.2% 
+21.9% 
+75.9% 

* Adjusted performance metrics are reconciled in note 31, the adjustments relate to IFRS 3 acquisition amortisation, share based payments charges, and non-recurring 
charges in respect of redundancies and acquisition costs and fair value adjustments. 
** Net cash / debt includes net cash with banks £1.4m (2021: £3.1m) less the fair value of deferred contingent consideration of £6.6m (2021: £7.5m) and excludes the right of 
use lease liabilities of £2.1m (2021: £2.5m).  

The Group has delivered: 

•  Revenue growth of 28.2%, including the first full year of acquisitions, with record revenue of £85.0m (2021: £66.3m) 

reflecting our pro-active approach to working in partnership with customers to manage supply and demand. 

•  Record  profitability  with  adjusted  operating  margins  increasing  40bps  to  8.7%,  based  on  solid  margins  in  both 

divisions. 

•  Adjusted fully diluted EPS up 29.1% to 70.6p (2021: 54.7p). 
• 

Strong operating cash generation of £6.0m (2021: £6.9m) supported investment in inventory of £6.9m  with reported 
cash conversion of 161% (2021: 162%). 

•  A dividend increase of 21.9% on the prior year, reflecting record adjusted performance in the year. 
•  An open order book on 31 May 2022 of £89.7m (31 May 2021: £51.0m) highlighting  75.9% organic growth. 

3 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT (continued) 

Strategic Achievements in 2021/22  

Notable achievements to advance our strategy included: 

• 

• 

Integration of the acquisitions of Willow Technologies Group (“Willow”) and Active Silicon Group (“Active Silicon”): 
o  Enhanced  technology  adding  a  portfolio  of  own  brand  image  processing  products  and  electro-mechanical 

components (including component manufacturing capabilities in USA). 

o  Broadened the international sales capabilities and resources in the USA and Europe. 
Continued investment in technical capabilities through our capital investment programme: 
o 

Semi automated battery pack wire bonding - providing improved quality and efficiency for volume battery pack 
production runs. 
In-house electromagnetic compatibility (“EMC”) testing capabilities. 

o 

Post period events: 

Proposed acquisition of Custom Power LLC (“Custom Power”), a strategically aligned, profitable, cash generative battery 
pack  manufacturer  for  a  total  consideration  of  up  to  $45.0m.  The  acquisition  is  expected  to  complete  in  early  August 
following the general meeting on 29 July 2022. 

Strategy 

The  Group  provides  customers  broad-based  access  to  trusted  electronic  technology  for  demanding  applications  and 
extreme environments and has a commercial focus on high growth markets including security & defence, medical, green 
energy, transport, communications and industrial.   

Our medium-term financial objective is to double fully diluted adjusted earnings (“aeps”) over each five year period.  This 
was  exceeded  in  the  five  years  to  31  March  2022,  when  aeps  increased  from  30  pence  to  71  pence  per  share.  The 
accelerated  growth  rate  achieved  in  recent  years  reflects  the  benefit  of  the  foundations  which  have  been  laid  and  the 
resulting new and exciting businesses. The Directors are fully committed to continuous development of our capabilities to 
build  on  this  success,  further  strengthening  our  partnership  approach  with  major  customers,  and  continuing  to  share 
rewards equitably amongst all our stakeholders. 

Not withstanding the acknowledged short term supply challenges, the demand outlook for customised electronic solutions 
offers exciting opportunities.  Many ground breaking technologies are embedded within our current activities, and there is 
scope  for  further  investment  in  specialist  skills  and  knowledge  to  expand  and  differentiate  our  offering  to  existing  and 
prospective customers, both through internal development and acquisition as we target international expansion. 

We are building ever closer relationships with our customers, adding substantial value through early stage integration into 
their  design  and  development  road  maps,  and  interlocking  with  their  operational  and  logistics  processes.    This  will  be 
achieved by further strengthening channels of co-operation between Group entities and building cross-selling specialist 
teams to facilitate ease of customer access to our full range of products and services. 

Governance and Accountability 

The  Board  structure  continues  to  evolve  as  we  strive  towards  full  implementation  of  all  the  principles  of  the  Quoted 
Companies Alliance code on Corporate Governance.  The Board currently comprises four executive directors and three non-
executive directors, including an independent non-executive Chair and a senior independent non-executive Director. It is 
the  intention  of  the  Board  to  recruit  an  additional  independent  non-executive  Director  in  the  coming  year,  ensuring 
appropriate  access  to  an  open  and  transparent  process  for  all  candidates,  being  cognisant  of  the  breadth  of  diversity. 
Following this appointment, the Board will have an equal balance of executive and non-executive directors with a  casting 
vote for the chair. 

An  annual  formal  Board  effectiveness  review  is  undertaken,  and  any  updates  to  Board  structure,  processes  and 
documentation are actioned without delay.  There is a continuous improvement approach to addressing the Environmental, 
Social and Governance (“ESG”) agenda, which is set out in this report, and this will continue to evolve in future reports as 
additional metrics are identified and progressed. 

In  communication  with  our  shareholders  and  others,  our primary  aim  is  to  provide  timely,  well  balanced,  and  succinct 
information about our business and its prospects to a wide audience on a regular basis.  In addition to our Annual General 
Meeting and scheduled meetings with key institutional shareholders, we participate in periodic on-line presentations which 
are open to all by prior arrangement on the “Investor Meet Company” platform (www.investormeetcompany.com).  

.  

4 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT (continued) 

Acquisitions 

The trading contribution from the two acquisitions made at the end of financial year 2020/21, Willow and Active Silicon, 
have each exceeded management’s expectations. The Willow acquisition provided the Components Division with a wider 
customer  base  and  product  offering,  significantly  increasing  the  portfolio  of  own  brand  components,    enabling  record 
revenues.  The  combined  skillsets  of  the  Systems  Division  and  the  Active  Silicon  acquisition  enabled  the  award  of  the 
Transport for London Piccadilly line upgrade contract and will provide further opportunities. Active Silicon bring expertise 
in the design and manufacture of imaging products and embedded vision systems. 

Post year end, the intended acquisition of US battery manufacturer Custom Power  was announced on 12 July 2022, subject 
to shareholder approval at the general meeting on the 29 July 2022. Custom Power is a strategically significant US based 
power specialist operating at scale in target growth markets for Solid State . This transaction aligns with the Group’s four 
key strategic goals and is a good fit with the existing power business unit. Custom Power is a profitable, cash generative 
business in high growth market sectors that will provide broader technical competencies and opportunities for stronger 
relationships with key suppliers. This will enable the enlarged Group to cross sell to both businesses’ international blue-
chip customers. The size of this acquisition will be transformational to the Power  business unit providing a step change, 
with Custom Power delivering revenues of approximately $29.8m in their financial year ended 31 December 2021.  

People 

There has been further investment  in the  Group  HR function in the current  year supporting the welfare of our people.  
Although the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic is receding, there has been ongoing attention to keep workplaces safe and 
a focus on broader social welfare. This includes access to a wellbeing at work support programme for employees and their 
families,  cash  back  opportunities,  pay  reviews,  bonuses  and  a  commitment  to  a  one-off  energy  bonus  payment  for  all 
employees in the next financial year. 

Dividend 

The Group has paid dividends every year since joining AIM in 1996. The Board is committed to maintaining a progressive 
dividend policy, however the Board’s focus when deploying capital is to continue to drive strong total shareholder returns 
comparable to historic periods.   

Accordingly, the Board is proposing a final dividend of 13.25 pence (2021: 10.75 pence) resulting in full year dividends of 
19.5 pence (16.0 pence) which is covered 3.6 times by adjusted earnings (2021: 3.4 times). 

Subject to approval of the final dividend by shareholders at the AGM on 7 September 2022, the final dividend will be paid 
on 5 October 2022 to shareholders on the register at the close of business on  2 September 2022, and the shares will be 
marked ex-dividend on 1 September 2022. 

Opportunities and prospects for 2022/2023 

The Group’s business model now serves a  wide customer  base of over 2,000 clients, operating across multiple sectors, 
offering a broad product range with specialist production facilities. This diversification provides the Group with resilience 
when  markets  are  challenging.  Whilst  the  forthcoming  period  will  no  doubt  continue  to  be  adversely  affected  by  
component shortages, having invested in inventories, in partnership with our customers, the Group is well placed to take 
advantage of the market conditions and emerge in a stronger position than many competitors.   

The acquisition of Custom Power, which is expected to complete following the general meeting on the 29 July 2022, will be 
transformational for our Power business unit providing a production facility in the USA. This clearly presents a very exciting 
opportunity for the Group in the power sector which is the area of the business which has the highest growth potential. 

The Group has achieved high order intake in Q1 2022/23 across its diverse sector exposure.  The strong open order book 
provides opportunities for significant growth in the current year, albeit this is expected to be influenced by component lead 
times. Presently the timing of supplies and programmes remains somewhat difficult to predict.  

The group has seen a strong start to the year with Q1 billings up 31% on a like for like basis with margins comparable with 
FY22.  This  excellent  start,  combined  with  the  Group’s  strong  financial  footing,  technology,  capabilities,  engineering 
specialisms, and its sector penetration in areas which are political priorities, for example in  defence, transportation and 
medical, mean the Board is confident that the Group is well placed to deliver continued growth. 

N Rogers 
Chairman 
27 July 2022 

5 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

Introduction to Solid State PLC 

The Group supplies electronic products, technology, and solutions, primarily designed for demanding applications where 
safety, performance, reliability, and quality are critical; enabling customers to focus on their core business with confidence 
by delivering trusted technology for demanding environments. 

Our Purpose – Why we do what we do! 

To establish our position as an international leader in providing sustainably engineered electronics technology systems and 
components enabling our stakeholders to realise value, maximise efficiencies, and reduce waste. 

Solid State’s mission and strategy to deliver growth 

Our Strategy – What we are doing 

The Group’s stated strategy to deliver on our purpose and mission has four key elements: 

6 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

The Group is focused on the design-in, supply and support of sustainably engineered, specialist electronics equipment and 
solutions from components, sub-assemblies, products, and embedded systems, through to complete integrated electronic 
solutions.   

The market for the Group’s products and services is driven by the need for bespoke specialist electronic solutions to address 
complex  needs,  typically  in  harsh  environments  where  enhanced  durability  and  resistance  to  extremes  of  humidity, 
temperature, pressure, vibration, and wind is vital.  Long life expectancy is built into our products regardless of application. 

A key part of the Group’s offering is its industry leading workforce. To ensure the Group builds on this, it invests significantly 
in the development of its technical staff and other professional personnel, through a combination of internal and external 
training  and  development  programmes  to  ensure  they  remain  as  industry  experts  at  the  forefront  of  their  respective 
technology areas.  Furthermore, the Group is constantly looking to broaden its talent pool through recruitment. 

The Group’s organic growth strategy is based on targeting the structural growth markets of security & defence,  medical, 
greentech, transport, energy, and industrial where there is significant Government and industry investment in technology 
aligned to the Group’s strengths. In implementing this strategy, the Group will continue to focus on retaining its diverse, 
customer and sector exposure ensuring Solid State maintains the resilience it has benefited from in recent times.  

The  Group  actively  targets  markets  with  high  barriers  to  entry,  requiring  accreditations,  long  standing  reputations  and 
specialist  test  and  measurement  capabilities.  This  enables  the  business  to  differentiate  its  offering,  develop  long  term 
symbiotic customer relationships where premium products and services are valued and reflected in the margins. 

The  Group  continues  to  invest  in  enhancing  the  range  and  scope  of  its  accreditations.  It  holds  multiple  accreditations 
covering health and safety, environmental, international aerospace standards, ATEX (controlling explosive atmospheres) 
and  others.  Where  required,  facilities  and  personnel  are  security  cleared  to  allow  secure  Government  work  to  be 
conducted.  

The Group has industry leading test & measurement and assembly capabilities, including a Class 7 clean room assembly 
facility, environmental and vibration testing capabilities, and a world class near-field RF test chamber.  

In the current year, the Group has continued to make significant investments  to further enhance its manufacturing and 
assembly capabilities with new wire bonding technology and an EMC chamber commissioned during first quarter. These 
facilities, combined with the technical and engineering expertise, mean the Group has a differentiated offering, providing 
class leading capabilities which are utilised across Solid State.  

Solid State PLC operating structure 

Note: Custom Power acquisition is subject to shareholder approval on 29 July 2022 

The Group has two operating Divisions, Components and Systems (previously Value Added Supplies and Manufacturing), 
with a shared mission, strategy and consistent business values. The illustration above shows the product focus areas. 

The  Group’s  principal  operations  are  based  in  the  UK  with  its  head  office  in  Redditch,  where  component  supplies 
warehousing and computing product manufacturing are located.   

The Group’s Power business unit (BU) battery pack manufacturing centre of excellence is in Crewkerne, Somerset, with 
Leominster in Herefordshire housing the bulk of the Group’s Communications BU.  

7 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

The  recent  acquisitions  have  added  industry 
leading  opto-electronic  assembly  capabilities  in 
Weymouth,  computing  board  level  design  and 
and 
production 
administration offices near to London Heathrow 
and Gatwick, respectively.  

component 

sales 

and 

The  2020/21  Willow  and  Active  Silicon 
acquisitions  provided  a  more  established  sales 
function  in  the  USA  as  well  as  a  significant 
freehold R&D and manufacturing facility for  key  
electromechanical products in Elkhart Indiana.  

Components  

The Components Division primarily supplies designed-in products and solutions at the component and sub assembly level. 
It is a market leader in delivering innovative, designed-in technical solutions for customers. The Division serves the needs 
of  the  original  equipment  manufacturing  (“OEM”)  and  the  contract  electronics  manufacturing  (“CEM”)  communities, 
principally  in the UK. The appointment  of several new third party representative  companies in the USA will be used to 
continue to accelerate the development of its international sales channels. 

Components represents a select number of Franchised suppliers who manufacture semiconductors, related electronic and 
opto-electronic components, modules, sensors, switches and displays as well as more recently developing a portfolio of 
own  brand  components  with  the  acquisitions  of  Pacer  (opto-electronic  components)  and  Willow  (electromechanical 
components).  The  team’s  depth  of  understanding  of  these  products  and  components  enables  the  Group  to  offer 
outstanding levels of commercial and “added value” technical support to its customers. 

The  products  and  components  supplied  are  from  globally  recognised  manufacturers  and  include  those  for  5G  and  the 
Internet of Things (“IoT”), embedded processing, control, wireless and wired communications, electromechanical, power 
management, optical emitters, and sensors, displays and LED lighting. 

Systems 

Operating with three principal business units (“BUs”), computing, power and communications, the Systems Division is a 
market leader with capabilities extending from the supply of simple electronics technology products and systems to the 
delivery of turnkey integrated solutions with significant engineering-based value-added content.  Capabilities encompass 
design, production, testing, commissioning,  training and through life support. 

The  Division  manufactures  high  specification  industrial  computers,  sophisticated  custom  battery  packs  and  advanced 
communication  systems,  including  specialist  antennas  and  high-performance  video  transmission  products.  Latterly  the 
acquisition of Active Silicon has enhanced the Division’s computing offering to include board level design and manufacturing 
capabilities primarily for image capture, processing, and transmission. It is the technical knowhow, design skills, production 
and testing resources, product quality and customer service levels, combined with over 30 years of experience of supplying 
products into the most demanding of environments, that provides significant differentiation from the Group’s competitors 
across the three BUs.  

Consistent with the Components Division, the strong and established partnerships with key suppliers in Asia and the USA 
are critical (including industry leading technology partners) and include Nvidia, IEI, Intel, Innodisk,  Molicel Panasonic, LG, 
Cisco and Persistent Systems. 

Competitive Advantage 

The Group is the subject  matter expert  for its customers, with deep industry knowledge and longstanding key supplier 
relationships.  In designing-in solutions to address the customer needs, the Group selects the most appropriate component, 
module, computing technology, battery chemistry, or communications solution to ensure Solid State is a trusted partner. 

The  Group  constantly  seeks  to  add  value  for  its  customers,  who  are  typically  looking  to  embrace  the  adoption  of  the 
enabling technologies where Solid State has industry leading component and manufacturing expertise, such as electronic 
and  optoelectronic  component  design-in,  image  processing,  Artificial  Intelligence  (“AI”),  IoT,  fossil  fuel  replacement, 
switching, cordless & portable power, and leading-edge communications / antenna solutions. 

8 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
Chief Executive’s Review 

STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Given the macro-economic backdrop, with the component supply shortages, Brexit and latterly inflationary pressures and 
volatile  exchange  rates,  this reporting  period  again  served  up some  of  the  most  challenging  business  conditions  in  our 
history.  As a result, I am very pleased to report 29.1% growth in adjusted diluted earnings per share over the prior year’s 
record result and a significant step change in revenue year on year at £85.0m (2021: £66.3m).  

The Group benefitted from the first full year of the two acquisitions and a few pull ins of demand at the end of the year 
where our team’s supplier relationships secured product pre year end, meaning we were able to fulfil some of the strong 
customer demand.  

The Group has a record open order book which, combined with our inventory management plan, positions Solid State to 
proactively  manage  the  well-publicised  electronics  supply  chain  issues  with  our  customers.  Despite  these  ongoing 
challenges, the Group has been able to make considerable strides in delivering its growth strategy in the current year.  

Solid State  reports a  strong year-end balance sheet  with net  assets of £27.1m and net  cash at the bank  of £1.4m.  The 
balance sheet strength has meant we have been able to proactively invest in inventories, which has been a critical factor in 
enabling the Group to provide the differentiated customer service which is core to our success. Furthermore, this strength 
means  the  Group  is  well  placed  to  continue  to  gain  a  competitive  advantage  when  managing  the  challenging  market 
conditions which are expected to continue through 2022 and into 2023.  

On 12 July 2022, the Group announced its intention to acquire Custom Power, a battery pack manufacturing business based 
in  California  USA,  for  a  total  consideration  of  up  to  $45.0m  subject  to  achieving  an  earn  out  hurdle.  The  acquisition  is 
expected to complete in early August following the general meeting on 29 July 2022 to approve the transaction. Full details 
of the transaction have been provided to shareholders within the circular which was posted on the 13 July 2022. 

This acquisition will be  transformational  for our Power business unit, enabling the Group to meet the increasing demand 
from its blue-chip tier one customers to provide power solutions on a transatlantic basis.  

Custom Power is a profitable and cash generative battery pack manufacturer. Like our business, they are engineering led 
and target markets with high barriers to entry where the engineering expertise is valued, and the production horizons are 
longer. As reported previously in the circular issued to shareholders, Custom Power delivered record proforma results in 
the year ended 31 December 2021 with revenue of approximately $29.8m, EBITDA of $3.5m and proforma net profit of 
$2.5m  (reported  net  profit  $1.9m).  Building  on  last  year’s  record  performance,  we  look  forward  to  delivering  further 
strategic progress and this acquisition is a critical building block for the Group in the execution of its strategy.  

The scale and broader portfolio of products now offered by the Group’s Components Division, has enabled  like for like 
Components’  revenues  to  grow  11%  year  on  year  to  £52.5m.  Furthermore,  the  Systems  Division  also  saw  like  for  like 
revenue growth at 4% at £32.5m but most pleasing was the significant improvement in adjusted systems gross margins to 
42.0% from 38.7%. 

Key stakeholder engagement 

Solid  State’s  pro-active  approach  to  managing  both  customer  and  supplier  stakeholders  during  the  year  has  been 
recognised positively with many providing positive feedback about how the Group has supported their businesses in these 
very difficult times. This is evidenced by the Group being awarded the  British Aerospace Supply to Win Gold award and 
several supplier awards recognising the Group’s value to their businesses. 

Throughout the pandemic and component supply challenges the business worked hard to ensure that it maintained timely 
and relevant communication and engagement with all stakeholders. The teamwork, support, and commitment from and 
by  the staff  has been  a  real success  factor.  The  workforce  has  recognised  and  valued the  investment  in  enhancing  the 
Group’s staff welfare programmes to provide both physical and mental health support, resources and benefits which are 
available to all employees. 

The  Group  continues  to  recognise  the  value  of,  and  invest  in,  its  staff  with  various  ongoing  professional  development 
initiatives.  This  is  critical  to  the  Group  continuing  to  both  retain  and  attract  exceptionally  high  calibre  staff  which  is 
necessary to maintain its market position and retain its trusted business partner relationships. 

We have continued to develop the Group’s staff and communities’ engagement activities; highlights in the year being a 
new initiative to support local food banks near each of our UK facilities; sponsoring a room at a local YMCA to provide safe 
accommodation  for  young  people  in  our  community  and  repeating  the  Solid  State  charity  walk.  In  support  of  all  our 
employees, at the year end the Group committed to paying an energy grant in the autumn of 2022 to help our colleagues 
with managing the very significant increase in the cost of living and energy costs ahead of the winter. 

9 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Delivery of the strategy 

In FY21/22 Solid State has continued to execute on its strategy, delivering improved financial performance with important 
strategic steps being taken across both operating divisions. 

Internationalise the business  

In  developing  our  international  sales  channels,  the  acquisitions  of  both  Active  Silicon  and  Willow  have  accelerated  our 
overseas sales.  

During  the  year  within  our  Components  Division  we  have  added  resources  into  our  USA  and  UK  sales  force  which,  in 
conjunction with adding several third-party representative companies in the USA, provides a foundation for growth in sales 
which is starting to be translated into orders reflected in our record order book. 

Post year end, the expected acquisition of Custom Power as part of our Systems Division, provides a step change for this 
division to penetrate the US power market. 

Investment in and enhancement of our talent 

During the year we have made significant strides in developing the senior management team, which has benefitted from 
the acquisitions of Willow and Active Silicon, both of which had a strong and talented work force which have been additive 
to the Group. The integration of our new colleagues from the acquisitions has been very positive, providing additional depth 
in talent and resource across our business. 

We  have  strengthened  the  USA  component  manufacturing  facility  (“AEC”)  leadership  team  by  appointing  a  general 
manager,  and  bolstering  the  local  engineering  and  sales  resource,  to  accelerate  the  development  of  our  own  brand 
electromechanical  product  range.  Furthermore,  we  have  invested  in  our  sourcing  team  where,  because  of  the 
semiconductor shortages, we have seen very significant demand for the expertise this team offers. This has translated into 
significant new revenue opportunities for our design-in Components Division. 

Within  our  Systems  Division,  the  divisional  MD  has  established  an  integrated  functional  leadership  team  to  drive  this 
division forward which has benefitted from the additional HR resource and talent who joined the Group as part of the Active 
Silicon acquisition. Post year end, the acquisition of Custom Power will add battery industry expertise and talent. Custom 
Power has a particularly strong complimentary engineering capability which will help to differentiate the Group’s power 
offering. 

Develop our portfolio of own brand products and complementary 3rd Party products  

Our Components Division has continued to develop its portfolio of franchise manufacturers in the period, taking on the 
ASUS industrial computing component line which provides IoT platforms, enhancing our portfolio of industrial computing 
components.  

During this period of shortages in the electronics sector, our breadth of components has enabled us to support customers 
in designing-in and supplying second sources for many components, providing customers with some resilience. This work 
adds value and provides new opportunities for the Group. 

The Group continues to invest in R&D projects to develop our portfolio of own brand products and components.  

The Computing business unit has extended our own brand fanless computing offering to include a low magnetic signature 
computing  product  which  is  increasingly  important  for  defence  applications,  including  those  with  demanding  EMC 
requirements. In addition, we have seen our TEMPEST accredited security product portfolio become market ready, which 
includes the Group’s keyboard video mouse (“KVM”) product and high-attenuation-smart-enclosure HASE units.  

In the Communications business unit, the development of the standard and semi-custom antenna portfolio (horns, spirals 
and  sinuous  antennas)  has  delivered  a  stable  platform  of  run  rate  business  which  is  enabling  longer  term  and  larger 
programmes to be targeted to provide sustainable organic growth. 

Within our Power business unit, we are keeping pace with the emerging battery chemistries and technology being driven 
by the automotive sector.  We remain a subject matter expert, offering our customers the most appropriate chemistry for 
their  given  application.  The  development  of  our  scalable  and  flexible  modular  pack  solutions  continues  to  progress 
positively, albeit COVID-19 and supply chain challenges have meant the progress has been hindered somewhat..  These 
products are applicable to multiple high growth, un-commoditised industrial markets that are adopting either a low carbon 
power source, cordless solutions and next generation autonomous technologies.   

10 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Broaden our technical manufacturing expertise / technology portfolio / designed in product base  

The  Group  has  made  significant  investments  to  further  enhance  its  manufacturing  and  assembly  capabilities  with  new 
automated  die  bonding  capabilities,  state  of  the  art  spectrum  analysis  equipment,  and  an  in-house  electromagnetic 
compatibility (“EMC”) chamber which was commissioned during first quarter of FY21/22.  

The EMC chamber now gives us the ability to complete pre-compliance EMC testing in-house. These facilities, combined 
with  technical  and  engineering  expertise,  mean  the  Group  has  a  differentiated  offering,  providing  class  leading 
manufacture, test and measurement capabilities that are utilised across the Group. Further investments are planned to 
encompass pre compliance TEMPEST test capabilities.  The Group also upgraded its environmental chamber to enable Solid 
State to conduct pre-compliance testing of its products to aerospace standards. 

Post  year  end,  the  Power  business  unit  commissioned  its first  wire  bonder  to  enable  semi  automation  of  battery  pack 
manufacturing, which is proving to be a point of differentiation with our customers, and we have already seen significant 
interest arising from new and existing prestigious customers looking to benefit from this technology on their new projects. 
Furthermore, this is a capability we will look to roll out to Custom Power once the transaction is complete. 

In addition to the investment in manufacturing equipment, we continue to enhance our capabilities and accreditations such 
as ATEX and our certification to build battery packs that are used in explosive atmospheres. Pleasingly, we are seeing growth 
in this particular specialist capability.   

The strength of the Group 

Cross-Group collaboration has been a key strategic focus to ensure the business maximises the commercial value of its 
extensive customer relationships.  The Group wide “Senior Leadership team” which was formalised last year in conjunction 
with the implementation of a Company Share Option Plan (“CSOP”) aligns the incentives of those individuals with Group 
performance. This approach has changed the level of engagement and aligned behaviours and the benefits are continuing 
to be seen with a further step change in cross-Group engagement and collaboration.  

The acquisitions of Active Silicon and Willow provided additional breadth and depth to the Group’s product and technology 
offering. In addition, the enlarged Group’s active customer base now exceeds 2,000, presenting significant opportunities to 
sell more of the broadened product range to the enlarged customer base.  

Managing and mitigating risk 

The business risks have been considered and, where practical, mitigated. However, the macro-economic and geopolitical 
risks  including  conflict  in  Ukraine,  the  aftereffects  of  COVID-19,  electronic  component  shortages,  uncertainty  in 
international trading relationships and the associated impact on foreign exchange, means that it continues to be difficult 
to predict supply and demand and therefore mitigate fully.  

Component  lead-times  remain  at  unprecedented  lengths  of  over  40  weeks  for  many  critical  components,  such  as 
semiconductors,  computer  processors,  PCBs,  some  embedded  processing  modules,  and  battery  cells.  The  Group  has 
continued to deliberately  increase the  working capital investment  in inventory to attempt  to secure future supply. The 
lengthening order book coverage means that scheduled orders as at 30 June 2022 go beyond the end of FY25; FY23 (69%), 
FY24 (21%) and FY25 and beyond (10%). 

The  Group’s  diversity  in  suppliers,  technology,  markets,  and  territory  is  a  key strength. It  provides  resilience  and  some 
mitigation against global headwinds and has enabled Solid State to deliver record results. Looking forward to the current 
year, we continue to believe that this diversity positions the Group well to weather the impact of any ongoing supply chain 
issues and take advantage of new opportunities.  

11 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Principal risks and uncertainties 

The Group has a process for the identification and management of risk as part of the governance structure operated by the 
Board. Management of risk is the responsibility of the Board of Directors. In managing and mitigating risk, a comprehensive 
and robust system of controls and risk management processes has been developed and implemented by the Board. 

The Board’s role in risk management includes: 

• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 

promoting a culture that emphasises integrity at all levels in the business; 
embedding risk management within the core processes of the business; 
setting the appetite for risk; 
determining the principal risks; 
ensuring that these are communicated effectively to the businesses; and, 
setting the overall policies for risk management and control. 

The  principal  risks  affecting  the  Group  are  identified  by  the  Group  Executive  team  within  their  functional  areas  of 
responsibility and are reviewed by the Board. 

In identifying the business risks below, the Group analyses risks across four key areas: 

• 
• 
• 
• 

strategic risk; 
operational risk; 
commercial risk; and, 
financial risk. 

The assessment of the potential impact is the pre-mitigation assessment and the year on year change reflects the change 
in likelihood of the risk having a significant impact on the business. 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Acquisition risk – (Strategic risk) 
Business risk 
• 
• 
• 
• 

Loss of key customers. 
Loss of key employees. 
Loss of key suppliers. 
Erosion of Intellectual 
property base. 
Failure to identify and 
complete profitable 
acquisitions. 
Failure to mitigate FX risk 
arising due to international 
acquisitions. 
Failure to integrate 
management reporting 
structures and control 
disciplines. 

• 

• 

• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
After successful completion of two acquisitions in the 
previous financial year, the Group expects to complete on 
another transaction in Q2 of FY23. 
 In managing these deals the following process was adopted: 
•  Rigorous due diligence to ensure that acquisitions can be 

effectively integrated, and all the relevant stakeholders 
are engaged, supportive and aligned. 
Pro-active and early engagement with: 
o 
key customers and suppliers; and, 
o  employees through the on-site presence of Solid 

State PLC management. 

Preparation and execution of a cross functional 
integration plan. 
Continued investment in development of technology in 
the acquired businesses. 
Integration into existing internal control frameworks, 
processes and reporting systems. 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Potential 
impact: 

Medium 

Effect: 

Integration of 
acquired 
business is not 
effective 

12 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Legislative environment and compliance – (Strategic risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 

Conflict in Ukraine, the 
enduring effects of Covid-19, 
Brexit and global trade 
restrictions have caused an 
increased level of complexity 
in the legislative and trading 
environment in which the 
Group operates. 

• 

•  Overseas competitors are 
favoured in their domestic 
markets. 
Failure to comply with 
applicable legislation, to 
include but not limited to: 
o  Export Control and 

• 

International Traffic in 
Arms Regulations (ITAR); 

o  Bribery Act; 
o  General Data Protection 
Regulation (GDPR); and, 
o  Employment legislation 

and company 
legislation. 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Potential 
impact: 

Medium 

Effect: 

Trading may be 
disrupted / 
restricted, 
reduced sales 
volumes and 
profitability. 

Solid State PLC has continued to trade while being 
compliant with the government’s COVID-19 restrictions. 
The business operates across seven independent 
operational sites, which have remained operational and 
adhered to best practice social distancing and hygiene 
protocols. The Group has invested in technology and 
equipment to ensure that staff who can work from home 
do so when appropriate. 
Post Brexit international trading has become more 
challenging with a significant increase in the 
administrative burden. The Group’s international 
exposure is increasing as it delivers on the strategy of 
growing international sales. As such the Group continues 
to consider establishing a mainland EU operation to 
support the Group’s international growth ambitions. The 
Board believes that the Group’s size and diversified 
structure gives it resilience, and places it in a far stronger 
position than smaller competitors within the customers’ 
supply chains. 

• 

•  Regular reporting of export / ITAR compliance, and 
detailed internal control processes and procedures. 
Continuing education of the Group’s employees on the 
legislative developments and requirements. 
Internal reviews and external audits. 

• 
•  Adopt suitable software systems where appropriate to 
aid export control procedures and assist with other 
compliance issues. 
The individual operating companies maintain operating 
procedures and are certified to internationally 
recognised standards, e.g. ISO 9001-2015, AS9100, 
AS9120, SC21. 

• 

13 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Supply chain interruption and cost inflation – (Operational risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
•  Active programme to maintain cross qualified second 

The ongoing significant 
electronics supply chain 
challenges (caused by 
demand outstripping supply) 
resulting in long lead times 
and Industry wide 
component shortages. 
•  Dependency on significant 

suppliers or dependency on a 
qualified supplier within a 
controlled supply chain. 
•  Risk of actual customer 

demand falling short of open 
orders recorded as a 
consequence of double-
ordering, over ordering, 
inability to obtain other 
necessary components and 
subsequent cancellation or 
re-scheduling. 

•  Risk of suppliers increasing 
component costs as a pre-
requisite to delivery placing 
margins at risk. 

sources of supply. 

•  Rigorous supplier quality management processes. 
•  Maintain close relationships with key suppliers to be 

• 

aware of potential supply issues. 
Place scheduled orders and hold buffer stock to minimise 
the effects of extended lead times. 

• 

•  Requiring customers to place orders on non-cancellable 
terms, and in some cases requiring cash deposits in 
advance providing milestone payments 
Close monitoring of gross margins and supply chain cost 
escalation, with back-to-back pricing adjustments with 
customers. 
The mitigation and strategy meant that through FY20/21 
and FY21/22 the Group has been able to manage the 
disruption and extended lead times with limited impact. 
However, if the disruption continues or worsens the 
Group may see delays in projects / programmes in the 
current and subsequent years. 

• 

Retention of key employees – (Operational risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Loss of key people and 
critical skills. 
Insufficient skilled employees 
Poor engagement and 
morale. 

• 
• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
•  Retention & development of talent is critical to the long 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

term success of the Group. 
Senior HR resource has been added to the team during 
the FY21/22 year. Reviewing and refining contracts of 
employment and conditions for best practice. 
Low staff turnover, many employees having been with 
the Group for more than ten years. 
The Group encourages and invests in CPD and training in 
core skills and competencies as appropriate. 
The Group pro-actively looks to develop its own talent 
and will be making further use of the government 
apprenticeship schemes. 
The Group pro-actively communicates with its 
employees. 
The Group reviews & benchmarks employee rewards to 
ensure the Group is fairly rewarding its employees. 

•  Active review of succession planning. 
• 

Investigation and sourcing of upgraded HR system to 
streamline people management processes. 

14 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Potential 
impact: 

High 

Effect: 

Quality issues, 
costs, sales 
volumes and 
profitability 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Potential 
impact: 

Medium 

Effect: 

Quality and or 
service level 
issues rise, and 
costs increased 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Failure of or malicious damage to IT systems – (Operational risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 
• 

The inability to access 
business critical data. 
The inability to efficiently run 
the operating companies. 

• 

The existing systems are reliable and functional. 
The Group has started to upgrade & standardise systems 
where appropriate providing improved functionality and 
support the development of the business. 
Certified as meeting the “Cyber Essentials” standards 
and post period our Systems Division achieved “Cyber 
Essentials Plus” status. Also considering “IASME” where 
appropriate. 

• 

•  Where businesses are acquired, the Group implement 

the “Cyber Essentials” standards as a key priority if they 
do not already meet this standard and “Cyber Essentials 
Plus / IASME” in due course. 

•  Automated daily back-ups of all business critical data. 
•  Operates off site storage of business critical data. 
•  Has established, documented, and tested disaster 

recovery plans. 

Natural disasters – (Operational risk) 
Business risk 
•  Natural disaster or medical 
epidemic / pandemic 
disrupts production 
capability, supply of 
materials or customer 
demand. 

• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 

The Group has a documented disaster recovery plan for 
each site. In addition, the Group has business 
interruption insurance, which subject to the terms of the 
cover purchased providing some insurance mitigation. 
The Group has documented COVID-19 protocols to 
mitigate the impact of any further variants. 

Competition risk – (Commercial risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Loss of distribution supplier 
franchise agreement would 
result in significant loss of 
product lines and customers. 
Loss of a major contract / 
customer or business to a 
competitor. 
Price / margin erosion due to 
predatory pricing from a 
competitor. 

• 

• 

Setting a commercial strategy to gain share by:  
Focusing on quality, value and customer service; 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 
o 
o  Develop and maintain close relationships with suppliers 
and customers to become the “partner of choice”, by 
forming multi-level partnerships; 

o  As a trusted partner providing product solutions from 

design, to pilot & volume production; and, 

o  Winning additional business from existing customers 
and capturing new customers and revenue streams. 
Continue to invest in product development to ensure 
competitive advantage. 
Continued investment in the recruitment of high quality 
personnel. 

• 

• 

15 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Potential 
impact: 

Medium 

Effect: 

Costs, sales, 
profitability and 
reputational 
damage 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Potential 
impact: 

Low 

Effect: 

Trading may be 
disrupted, 
reduced sales 
volumes and 
profitability 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Potential 
impact: 

High 

Effect: 

Loss of market 
share, reduced 
sales volumes 
and profitability 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Potential 
impact: 

Medium 

Effect: 

Sales volumes 
and profitability 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Potential 
impact: 

High 

Effect: 

Going concern / 
Financial loss 
and 
reputational 
damage 

STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Product / Technology change – (Commercial risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 

Failure to maintain the 
Group’s leading technical 
capabilities and knowledge 
which allows us to develop 
electronic solutions in 
partnership with the Group’s 
customers. 
Failure to manufacture 
solutions that meet the 
agreed specification. 
Failure of key distribution 
franchises to innovate and 
introduce new products. 

Continued investment in the technical training and 
development of sales, engineering and operations staff, 
building their capabilities. 
Investment in joint R&D programmes with partners to 
ensure the Group is at the forefront of technical 
electronic solutions. 

• 

•  Maintain rigorous quality and engineering control 

processes to ensure that the Group’s products meet the 
required specifications. 
Perform all necessary detailed product testing to ensure 
that products are fit for purpose. 
Continuously seek new franchises, suppliers and partners 
at the forefront of electronics technology. 

• 

• 

Forecasting and financial liquidity – (Financial risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 

• 

• 

• 

The business does not 
maintain sufficient funding 
and liquidity to meet its 
obligations as they fall due. 
The business commits to a 
materially significant loss 
making contract. 

The Group prepares financial forecasts to evaluate the 
level of funding required for the foreseeable future. 
These forecasts are reviewed and approved by the 
Board. 
Extensive disclosure has been provided in respect of 
going concern and longer-term viability (see page 39, 40 
76 and 77). 

• 

•  Based on these forecasts appropriate funding and 

liquidity solutions are put in place to ensure that 
adequate headroom is maintained. 

•  At the year-end 31 March 2022, the Group had a 

revolving credit facility of £7.5m (£6.0m undrawn) and 
net cash (excluding deferred consideration and lease 
obligations) of £1.42m (2021: £3.18m).  
Subsequent to year-end, to finance the expected 
acquisition of Custom Power, the Group has completed 
an equity raise of up to £28.4m (assuming full 
subscription under the open offer, the issue of the 
maximum number of subscription shares and subject to 
shareholder approval) and entered in to two new term 
loan facilities with Lloyds; a £6.5m five year amortising 
term loan at 2.85% and a second £6.5m three year 
interest only term loan at 2.95%. 
The Group has a defined delegation of authority matrix 
and contract risk register. 
The Group ensures sufficient funding is in place prior to 
completion of acquisitions.  

• 

• 

• 

16 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Chief Financial Officer’s Review 

To  provide  a  fuller  understanding  of  the  Group’s  ongoing  adjusted  performance,  several  adjusted  profit  measures  as 
supplementary information are included on a consistent basis with that reported by the financial analysts that review our 
business. As detailed in note 31, the adjusted measures eliminate the impact of certain non-cash charges and non-recurring 
items together with the associated tax impact. 

Revenues 

Group revenues of £85.0m (2021: £66.3m) reflect the inclusion of a full 12 months of revenue from the two acquisitions 
made  at  the  end  of  financial year  20/21,  both  of  which  outperformed  management  expectations.  Like-for-like  revenue 
(based on proforma 2021: £81.3m) was £3.7m (4.6%) ahead of prior year. This is an excellent result in the ongoing context 
of well-publicised supply challenges as well as circa 5% foreign exchange headwinds with the average US dollar rate moving 
from circa 1.30 in FY21 to 1.37 during FY22, which suppressed the revenue growth. 

The UK electronics distribution and semiconductor components industry expected growth of around 2.7% in the period 
while noting the absence of clear guidance from customers (source ECSN). The Components Division achieved revenues of 
£52.5m (2021: £39.0m) including the Willow acquisition, with like-for-like revenues exceeding expectations up 11.5% on 
the prior year at £52.5m (2021 proforma: £47.1m).  

The Systems Division reported revenue of £32.5m (2021: £27.3m), with like-for-like revenue up £1.1m (3.5%) to £32.5m 
(2021  proforma:  £31.4m)  against  a  very  challenging  macro-economic  backdrop.  Supply  chain  pressures,  including 
component availability, and the requirement for board and system redesigns as a result, have caused project delays.  

The two acquisitions considerably outperformed initial expectations contributing significantly to the overall Group result. 
The acquired businesses saw significant benefit from being part of the enlarged Group, driving considerable organic growth. 
Willow had an excellent year with like for like revenues increasing by 26% to £11.5m (2021: £9.1m). Similarly, Active Silicon  
saw like for like revenues increase 45% to £6.4m (2021: £4.4m), reflecting a strong recovery from the adverse impact of 
COVID-19 in the comparative period. 

Gross profit 

Reported gross margins of £27.5m (2021: £19.9m) are up £7.6m. There was an adverse impact of acquisition accounting 
charges in both years which have been excluded in the adjusted gross margins (see note 31). 

Adjusted gross profit for the year is up £7.7m to £27.7m (2021: £20.0m). The Group’s adjusted gross margin has increased 
to 32.6% (2021: 30.2%) reflecting increased margins in both Divisions, Components seeing a 2.5% increase and Systems a 
3.5% increase.  

In  managing  forex  we  look  to  mitigate  the  profit  impact  by  quoting  in  currency  of  main  supply  when  possible.  The 
improvement in the reported margin percentage is in part driven by the dollar exchange rate movements as result of the 
Group benefitting from being largely naturally hedged against foreign exchange movements at a gross margin level. 

The acquisitions of Active Silicon and Willow have improved the margins of their respective Divisions as they have a higher 
proportion of own brand manufactured products and components, which command stronger margins.  

Components  contributed  adjusted  gross margin  of £14.0m (2021: £9.4m) and the Systems Division contributed £13.7m 
(2021: £10.6m).  

17 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
      
      
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Sales, general and administration expenses 

Sales, general and administration (“SG&A”) expenses increased to £23.8m (2021: £15.6m), with the acquisitions adding 
approximately £4.1m to base overheads. The increase is partially driven by a resumption of business activities such as travel, 
marketing, and events with the easing COVID-19 restrictions. In addition, in recognition of this record performance there 
was further  investment  in  our  team to  attract  new,  and retain our  existing, talent as we look  to  enhance our  technical 
expertise and drive continued growth. Post COVID-19 there was no significant grant income in 2022 (2021: £0.3m).  

Furthermore,  there  were  non-recurring  expenses  within  SG&A,  being  a  £1.7m  increase  in  the  Active  Silicon  earn-out 
provision  and  £0.5m  in  relation  to  acquisition  costs.  Other  exclusions  from  adjusted  profit  measures,  consistent  with 
previous years, include acquisition intangibles amortisation of £1.0m (2021: £0.7m) and the share-based payments charge 
of £0.3m (2021: £0.2m). 

Adjusted SG&A expenses increased by £5.8m to £20.3m (2021: £14.5m) reflecting the addition of the acquisitions to base 
costs and the decision to resume spending on controllable costs which were restricted in the COVID-19 period.  

Operating profit  

Adjusted  operating  margins  increased  to  8.7%  (2021:  8.3%)  with  adjusted  operating  profit  up  to  £7.4m  (2021:  £5.5m) 
reflecting stronger margins and contribution from acquisitions. Reported operating profit was down 14% to £3.7m (2021: 
£4.3m) primarily because of the increase in acquisition related accounting charges. The adjustments to operating profit are 
set out in further detail in note 31. 

We have recognised £0.01m (2021: £0.01m) within operating profit in respect of research and development expenditure 
credit (“RDEC”) in addition to the tax credits recognised within the tax line, where we are eligible for the SME R&D tax 
scheme. These development programmes are a cornerstone of the Group’s future high value add revenue streams. 

18 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
     
       
 
     
      
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Profit before tax 

Adjusted profit before tax was up 33.2% to £7.2m (2021: £5.4m). Reported profit before tax was down 16.7% to £3.5m 
(2021: £4.2m). This is reported after a share-based payments charge of £0.3m (2021: £0.2m), amortisation of acquisition 
intangibles of £1.0m (2021: £0.7m) and non-recurring charges of £2.4m (2021: £0.3m). The £2.4m non recurring charges 
include a £1.7m increase in the deferred contingent consideration, £0.5m of transaction costs in relation to the planned 
acquisition of Custom Power and £0.2m of fair value acquisition accounting charges in relation to Willow. 

Profit after tax 

The Group benefits from the R&D tax credit scheme which reduces the underlying effective tax rate for the year to 14% 
(2021: 12%) from the standard rate of 19%. As the Group grows and profitability increases the benefit of R&D tax credits 
will diminish, furthermore once the Group exceeds the SME thresholds and is no longer eligible for the SME scheme, there 
will be a step up in effective tax rate as the SME scheme is much more generous that the large company scheme.  

Adjusted profit after tax was up 30.1% to £6.2m (2021: £4.7m). Reported profit after tax was down 37.5% to £2.5m (2021: 
£4.0m), as we recognised the impact of the expected future tax rate change from 19% to 25%, and did not have the benefit 
of the non-recurring R&D tax credits recognised in 2021, in addition to the non-recurring charges as noted above. 

EPS 

Adjusted fully diluted earnings per share for the year ended 31 March 2022 is up 29.1% to 70.6p (2021: 54.7p). Reported 
fully diluted earnings per share is down 36.8% to 28.9p (2021: 45.7p). 

Dividend 

The Board is proposing a final dividend of 13.25p (2021: 10.75p), giving a full year dividend of 19.50p (2021: 16.0p) as set 
out in the Chairman’s statement on page 5.  

Cash flow from operations 

Cash  inflow  from  operations  for  the  year  of  £6.0m  is  down  from  £6.9m  in  2021,  primarily  due  to  our  investment  in 
inventories, resulting in a working capital outflow of £2.5m (2021: £0.4m inflow). This delivers an adjusted operating cash 
conversion percentage of 81% (2021: 127%) and a reported operating cash conversion percentage of 161% (2021: 162%). 

The working capital cash outflow in the period of £2.5m is driven by an increase in receivables of £3.7m and inventories of 
£6.9m offset in part by an increase in payables of £8.1m. The increase in inventories reflects our strategic investment in 
product to support our significant increase in customer orders. The strength of customer and supplier relationships has 
helped us to manage the cash challenges of the working capital investment effectively. This investment to secure product 
has provided us with a competitive advantage and is critical in these times of shortages to ensure product is available to 
fulfil customer demand.   

Investing activities  

During the year, the Group invested £1.1m (2021: £0.4m) in property plant and equipment, and £0.6m (2021: £0.3m) in 
software and research & development intangibles. The Group’s capital expenditure programme saw the installation of the 
new EMC test and measurement capability completed.  In addition, investment in a wire bonder and improved battery test 
equipment will deliver a step change in technology for the Power business unit in Systems.  

19 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
    
         
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Investing activities – cont’  

In the Components Division, there was investment into the Willow sites and further replacement of older  vehicles with 
hybrid and electric models. 

There are capital commitments of £0.3m (2021: £0.4m) at the balance sheet date, primarily relating to planned upgrades 
to existing IT systems. 

During  the  year  payments  in  respect  of  the  acquisitions  of  Active  Silicon  and  Willow  totalled  £2.6m  (2021:  £4.1m). 
Furthermore, at year end we have reassessed and increased the Active Silicon deferred contingent consideration by £1.7m 
to take the total to £6.6m (2021: £7.5m). A reconciliation of deferred contingent considerations is included in Note 21. 

Financing activities 

The Group has entered or extended leases during the year which has resulted in the recognition of £0.3m of additional right 
of use assets with a corresponding right of use liability, in accordance with IFRS16. Cash payments were made in the period 
in respect of lease liabilities of £0.9m (2021: £0.6m). Two properties were exited in the period, with Willow inventory moved 
to the Redditch location to rationalise activities. 

The financing activities reflect a part repayment of the revolving credit facility (RCF) of £2.25m where the £3.75m drawdown 
in 2021 was used to fund the acquisition of Willow and Active Silicon at the end of the last year. Solid State continues to 
have a strong relationship with Lloyds Bank and Lloyds has extended the term of the £7.5m (2021: £7.5m) revolving credit 
facility which is now committed until 30 November 2023. At 31 March 2022 £1.5m of the facility was drawn.  

The Group has deferred contingent consideration liabilities where, at 31 March 2022, the fair value has been estimated to 
be £6.6m, of which £4.6m was paid in Q1 2022/23. The Group utilised the RCF facility to fund the final £3.5m deferred 
consideration payment for Willow and initial £1.1m payment for Active Silicon. Subject to Active Silicon meeting the year 
two earn out performance target, it is expected that a final payment of approximately £2.0m will be payable in Q1 2023/24. 

The Group paid out £1.5m (2021: £1.2m) in respect of dividends and purchase of own shares. 

Statement of financial position 

During the year, the Group has continued to strengthen its balance sheet position. The Group’s net assets have increased 
to  £27.1m  (2021:  £25.5m)  reflecting  the  retained  profits  in  the  year. Excluding  deferred  contingent  considerations and 
IFRS16 lease obligations, the Group had a net cash position of £1.4m at the year-end (2021: £3.2m) having paid a further 
£2.6m consideration for the acquisitions of Active Silicon and Willow. 

As  a  result  of  the  unprecedented  supply  chain  challenges,  the  Group  has  increased  the  working  capital  investment  in 
inventory by £6.9m. Securing the supply of critical components is essential to enable the delivery of customer demand in 
the next financial year. The Group has also paid suppliers on a proforma basis where required to secure inventory in short 
supply (now often on lead times of six months or more). We have worked in partnership with customers who have, in many 
cases, made payments in advance to secure supply, and this has been a critical part of managing working capital.  

KPIs 

In addition to the KPI information provided in the Chairman’s Report and this Strategic Report, the Directors use several 
key performance indicators to manage the business, disclosed in the financial review on pages 17 to 20. Non-financial 
KPIs are not disclosed other than in the environmental CO2e reporting on page 24. 

Companies Act Section 172 requirements and disclosures  

Disclosure of how the Group complies with the section 172 requirements are included on page 30. 

20 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Outlook 

The  recovery  of  sectors  which  were  adversely  impacted  by  COVID-19,  such  as  oil  &  gas  and  commercial  aviation,  has 
progressed.    Engineering  work  undertaken  during  the  pandemic  particularly  in  the  Power  business  unit  of  the  Systems 
Division  is  now  converting  to  production  orders.  The  Group  continues  to  see  demand  in  these  core  areas,  whilst  also 
developing its presence in new and emerging growth markets.  

Two of the key technology areas where the Company expects to see significant growth in demand; are first in image capture, 
processing, and transmission, driven by increased adoption of industrial AI and the roll out  of 5G; and  secondly  power 
control and switching driven by the need to reduce carbon emissions and development of the EV (Electric Vehicle) market. 
The Group’s acquisitions of Willow and Active Silicon have enabled Solid State to strengthen its position in these sectors, 
with the opportunities to further penetrate these markets and so gain market share. 

The  Group  has  a  strong  and  long  established  position  in  the  security  and  defence  sector.    As  a  result  of  geo-political 
uncertainties  this  market  is  seeing  significant  investment  in  technology  where  the  Group  is  well  placed  to  deliver. 
Furthermore, the shift by prime contractors following the pandemic away from globalised supply chains to buying more of 
their vital electronics and services closer to home continues to be positive for Solid State.  

On  the  12  July  2022,  Solid  State  PLC  announced  the  planned  acquisition  of  Custom  Power,  which  is  expected  to  be 
transformational for the Power business unit, providing a step change in the Group’s power capabilities giving this business 
unit scale.  

The Group is actively developing its pipeline of future acquisition opportunities albeit these are at an early stage. These 
opportunities are primarily focused on broadening the Group’s product offering and further strengthening its international 
sales  channels.  The  Company  will  remain  agile,  continuing  to  look  to  be  opportunistic  should  a  strategically  aligned 
acquisition target arise. 

Margin improvement, in conjunction with technology developments both from internal R&D and acquisitions across both 
Divisions has placed the Group in a strong position. The Group will remain focused on cross Group collaboration initiatives 
to drive organic growth. The technologies added through recent acquisitions further add scale and capability which the 
Group can provide to the enlarged customer base.  

During the financial year Solid State has seen record order intake, increasing the open order book 107% to £85.5m at 31 
March  2022  from  £41.3m  at  31  March  2021.  Positively,  post  year-end  the  Group  has  continued  to  drive  order  intake 
increasing the open order book at 30 June 2022 to £92.0m up 7.6% from 31 March 2022. This provides confidence over 
customer demand for the coming year. 

As  Solid  State  looks  forward  to  FY22/23,  the  continuing  well-publicised  supply  chain  issues  within  the  electronics  and 
particularly semiconductor sector mean the inconsistencies in the traditional supply and order fulfilment balance remain.  
The strength of the Group’s balance sheet means it is better placed to manage the working capital demands than some of 
its smaller competitors, which is presenting new customer opportunities.  Pleasingly, the collaboration with customers and 
suppliers to secure product which began in the late summer of 2020 is now delivering a strong start to sales this financial 
year. 

The opportunities for significant  growth across both  Divisions are very exciting and  the  acquisition of  Custom Power  is 
expected to be an important catalyst enabling Solid State to deliver on its five year ambition of matching or exceeding the 
performance achieved over the preceding five years.  

21 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Cautionary statement 

This report contains forward-looking statements that are based on current expectations or beliefs, as well as assumptions 
about future events. These forward-looking statements can be identified by the fact that they do not relate only to historical 
or current facts.  

Forward-looking statements often use words such as anticipate, target, expect, estimate, intend, plan, goal, believe, will, 
may, should, would, could, is confident, or other words of similar meaning.  

Undue reliance should not be placed on any such statements because they speak only as at the date of this document and, 
by their very nature, they are subject to known and unknown risks and uncertainties and can be affected by other factors 
that could cause actual results, and Solid State PLC’s plans and objectives, to differ materially from those expressed or 
implied in the forward-looking statements. 

There  are  a  number  of  factors  which  could  cause  actual  results  to  differ  materially  from  those  expressed  or  implied  in 
forward-looking  statements.  These  risks  and  uncertainties  include,  among  other  factors,  changing  economic,  financial, 
political, business or other market conditions.  

Solid State PLC is under no obligation to revise or update any forward-looking statement contained within these financial 
statements, regardless of whether those statements are affected as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, 
save as required by law and regulations.  

The strategic report on pages 6 to 22 has been approved by the Board of Directors and signed on its behalf by: 

G S Marsh 
Chief Executive Officer 
27 July 2022 

P O James 
Chief Financial Officer 

22 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE AND SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY REPORT 

Environmental 

Principles 

The two guiding principles that underline the Group’s environmental objectives are to reduce consumption and to reduce 
waste. These principles can be embraced by everyone in the business in a small or large way to make a positive contribution 
to delivering a sustainable business operation. 

The  Group’s  activities  can  be  summarised  as  largely  supply,  manufacturing/assembly  operations,  combined  with  office 
based  research,  product  development  and  other  commercial  functions,  where  we  essentially  receive  materials  and 
products from suppliers, assemble them into a new product and dispatch them to customers. 

Examples  of  how  the  Group  can  embrace  these  principles  include  direct  engineering  solutions  such  as  utilisation  of 
technology which optimises/minimises power consumption in our systems and re-use of surplus heat. Indirect solutions 
include improvement to customer yields, reducing waste and solutions that reduce power consumption.  

Scope 3 

The most significant impact on the environment, over which the Group has some control, is the sourcing of products and 
materials (primarily from Asia and USA) and the supply of finished product to customers (Scope 3 carbon impact). To date 
the Group has not been able to capture and assess the level of Scope 3 Carbon it has consumed to meet additional voluntary 
disclosure requirements, however the Group does capture its scope 1 and 2 carbon consumption data.  

We continue to evaluate how we best approach capturing the data from our scope 3 emissions. This is an important step 
in continuing to deliver on reducing the Group’s carbon footprint and part of integrating the Group’s ESG strategy within 
the 2022-2027 Group strategy review.  

Solid State Plc is committed to achieving net zero by 2050. This is compliant with new measures introduced in September 
2021 requiring suppliers bidding for major government contracts (>£5m) to commit to net zero by 2050 and to produce a 
credible  carbon  reduction  plan.  This  will  require  the  reporting  of  certain  Scope  3  emissions,  including  business  travel, 
employee commuting, transportation, distribution, and waste.  

The most significant component of the Group’s scope 3 emissions is expected to be the impact of third-party carriers the 
Group utilises to receive and deliver their products. The Group’s ability to control the environmental impact of its logistics 
partners is not absolute. However, we can and do look to use preferred suppliers who are positively engaged with a carbon 
reduction  commitment  to  align  with  our  ambitions.  The  first  potential step  change  we  are  exploring  is  to  move  where 
possible our inbound freight to sea freight rather than air freight given the significant environmental benefit of sea freight.  

Scope 1 & 2 

In terms of the Scope 1 and 2 emissions, the operations consume normal business energy sources such as heating and 
power, which the Group aims to  reduce by focusing on minimising energy consumption through the efficient operating 
practices  and  compliance  with  relevant  environmental  legislation.  However,  the  largest  factor  impacting  energy 
consumption in our facilities is the weather. In a year with moderate summer / winter weather our energy consumption is 
low, however if we face extreme hot / cold weather the energy consumption increases significantly. 

Waste management is a critical part of conducting our business. We comply with all the relevant waste legislation with the 
key  areas  of  legislation  being  The  Waste  Batteries  and  Accumulators  Regulations  2009  and  the  Waste  Electrical  and 
Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive in conjunction with RoHS. 

Where appropriate the Group actively works with its customers to ensure that all hazardous waste is properly managed. In 
complying with the waste legislation, the Group ensures that all waste is disposed of properly and waste is recycled where 
it is practicable to do so.  

The Group has a fleet of company cars which have been included in the Group’s carbon reporting. The Group continues to 
actively move the company owned cars to be low CO2, Hybrid or Electric vehicles as they are replaced. All Group facilities 
participate  in  recycling  paper,  plastic  and  cardboard.  Local  management  teams  are  committed  to  good  environmental 
practices and are responsible for implementing appropriate programmes to meet their local obligations. The Group also 
intends to explore greener options at the point of renewing the gas heating contracts for various sites. 

23 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE AND SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY REPORT 
 (continued) 

Carbon data reporting 

As a company quoted on AIM, the Group is required to report its Scope 1 and Scope 2 CO2e. The Board believes there are 
direct benefits to our organisation in the measuring and reporting of environmental performance, which should assist the 
Group to reduce its energy consumption and therefore resource costs, as well as gaining a better understanding of the 
Group’s exposure to the risks of climate change.  

This is year 3 of collecting the data which can be compared to the baseline CO2 consumption for the financial year 2019–
20. Where possible the Group has reported its figures using billed data, which relates to its premises and activities.  

Data  has  been  collected  for  the  following  CO2  emission  sources:  electricity  consumption;  gas  consumption;  water 
consumption; company owned vehicles and waste processing. In collating this data, we have utilised the 2021 conversion 
factors (2021: 2020 conversion factors) to obtain a figure for the CO2 consumption of the Group compared to the baseline 
reported last year. 

Our 2020 baseline was 434 tonnes of CO2e equating to 1,843,758kwh. On a like for like basis (excluding the acquisitions) 
2022 continued to see a reduction due to the actions we have taken to reduce travel and activity (reflecting behavioural 
changes post COVID-19) to 216 tonnes of CO2e, which equates to 1,010,900 kwh. Including the Willow and Active Silicon 
acquisitions, the value for 2022 is 462 tonnes of CO2e, equating to 2,334,523kwh. This is in-line with our expectations as 
the new US AEC manufacturing site is energy intensive due to the furnace for baking the glass to metal seals.  

Added value is used as the intensity ratio (CO2e / £1M added value). The Group defined “added value” as the “gross margin” 
as it is believed that this best represents business output. In 2019/20 our baseline intensity ratio was 20.9 Tonnes per £1m 
of value added. Including the acquisitions, the 2022 ratio is 14.37 Tonnes per £1m of value added (2021:  11.3 Tonnes). 
Maintaining a lower intensity ratio than 2020 is considered very positive given the change in operating activities with the 
acquisition  of  Willow  and  Active  Silicon.  We  have  developed  a  plan  to see  continued  mid-term  reduction  through best 
practice actions we continue adopt to minimise and reduce our carbon consumption. 

Code of business conduct, ethics, and anti-corruption 

The Group’s policy sets out the values and standards of behaviour expected from all employees. In addition, it addresses 
expectations relating to the day-to-day conduct of business partners and agents who act as representatives of the Group.  

The policy also deals with how employees, business partners and agents can report any concerns that may arise. The policy 
actively promotes corporate social responsibility across our Group. It addresses how the Group works with a wide range of 
third-party organisations in areas such as ethical employment policies, educational and community work. 

It sets out the responsibilities of employees in ensuring that they carry out their business activities in a manner aligned with 
the Group’s values and business principles.  

All staff are required to ensure that they comply with all relevant laws and regulations of the countries in which we operate 
and  do  business.  The  policies  also  set  out  behaviours  that  are  unacceptable  and  which  could  bring  Solid  State  PLC’s 
reputation into disrepute. 

The policy contains guidance on avoiding conflicts of interest, confidentiality, adherence to export controls, our approach 
to gifts and hospitality, bribery and corruption and managing relationships with third parties. 

Upholding the policy is the responsibility of all Solid State PLC employees and business partners. We actively encourage 
everyone to report any behaviour which may be in breach of the Code, is unethical or illegal. This is achieved by fostering 
a culture of openness and accountability, and by providing a clear procedure that enables any individual to raise breaches 
of policy or malpractice directly at the highest level. 

All those working for, or on behalf of, Solid State PLC are required to confirm that they have read and understood the Anti-
corruption & Bribery Policy, and a copy of the policy is readily available to all employees. 

Bribery Act 

The Group implements and enforces effective systems to uphold a zero tolerance approach to bribery and corruption. To 
ensure it only works with third parties whose standards are consistent with the Group’s, all agents and third parties who 
act on behalf of the Group are obliged by written agreement to comply with the standards set out in the Group’s Anti-
corruption & Bribery Policy. 

24 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE AND SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY REPORT 
 (continued) 

Commercial business practices 

The Group is committed to acting professionally, fairly and with integrity in all our business dealings and relationships. We 
work with our partners to adopt best business practices, which include: 

In our dealings with customers 

Working closely in partnership with customers and potential customers to help us improve the value we can add to them 
through our products and services; 

Being open and honest about our products and services, communicating with customers all appropriate information they 
need to ensure we consistently meet their expectations; 

Ensuring that any issues or problems are dealt with efficiently, with fairness and in a timely manner; 

Ensuring that we seek feedback to benchmark and evaluate what we do in order to help us deliver continuous improvement 
in our products and services to maintain our value. 

In our dealings with suppliers 

Working with our suppliers to help us improve the value of the products and services we offer to customers with the benefit 
of the access to the supply chain that we have; Identifying and selecting suppliers to work in partnership with using fair and 
reasonable methodologies; 

Identifying and working with suppliers who operate to ethical business standards; 

The  semiconductor  shortages  which  the  industry  is  facing  has  meant  we  are  working  closely  with  suppliers  to  help  us 
improve the value of the products and services we offer customers to the benefit of the supply chain by making the supply 
chain as efficient as possible. We are actively looking to improve the efficiency of the supply chain and stock utilisation to 
meet customer demand wherever possible. 

In our relationships with employees and other stakeholders 

The  Group  ensures  employment  practices  throughout  the  Group  are  fair  and  in  full  compliance  with  employment 
legislation.  The  team  are  encouraged  to  volunteer  and  support  community  activities  and  the  Group  is  supportive  of 
initiatives and projects which enable our staff to make a positive contribution in their communities. In the current year, this 
has included donations to local food banks and sponsoring a room at a local Youth Hostel.  

Furthermore, the Group continue to support employees participating in voluntary mentoring and business advisory services 
via professional bodies and educational institutions which provide fantastic development opportunities for all. 

How we invest in our people 

The Group’s success depends on its people. The Group recognises the important role its employees play, and that effective 
teamwork is critical to achieving its corporate goals. 

The  Group  is  committed  to  making  Solid  State  a  “great  place  to  work”  where  the  teams’  actions  and  behaviours 
demonstrate  this  commitment  each  and  every  day.  This  is  aimed  at  providing  an  environment  of  teamwork  and 
collaborative respect, where the staff are all valued for their contribution, and everyone is proud to be part of “the Solid 
State team”.  

The Group provides employees with access to a Health cash plan to support day to day and more specialist medical needs, 
including access to a GP 24 hours a day. A fully funded Employee Assistant Program is available to help employees with 
financial, legal and/or mental health challenges. Employees also have access to a high street discount platform giving the 
opportunity to make savings on their daily purchases. Tangible support for each employee relating to the cost of living crisis 
includes at least a 5% pay rise and a commitment to make a one-off energy payment in the FY23 financial year. 

The  Group  maintains  equality  of  opportunity  in  all  employment  practices,  policies,  and  procedures  regardless  of  race, 
nationality, gender, age, marital status, sexual orientation, disability and religious or political beliefs. As part of our policies, 
we set out our approach to diversity. 

25 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE AND SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY REPORT 
 (continued) 

Human rights 

Solid State PLC is committed to respecting the human rights of all those working with or for us. We do not accept any form 
of child or forced labour and we will not do business with anyone who fails to uphold these standards.  

Modern slavery 

The Modern Slavery Act addresses the role of businesses in preventing modern slavery within their organisation and in their 
supply chains. The Group has a zero-tolerance approach to modern slavery and is committed to acting ethically and with 
integrity in all its business dealings and relationships and to implementing and enforcing effective systems and controls to 
ensure modern slavery is not taking place anywhere in its business or in any of its supply chains. The Group has developed 
and implemented policies to comply with the requirements of the UK’s Modern Slavery Act. Reference to the policy may 
be found on the corporate website at www.solidstateplc.com. 

Health and Safety 

Solid State PLC places health and safety at the core of all the business activities to ensure a safe working environment for 
everyone involved in the business. As a corner stone of our business operations health and safety reporting is a standing 
item on the Board agenda and Key management meetings. 

All employees are encouraged to take an active role in ensuring that our working environment is a safe place to work and 
visit by actively reporting all safety observations and incidents, being involved in safety audits, risk assessments and regular 
awareness training sessions. 

The operations teams are actively involved in electronics industry-wide initiatives, working with industry associations, and 
proactively  registering  under  new  regulatory  directives  such  as  Registration,  Evaluation,  Authorisation  &  restriction  of 
Chemicals (REACH) and Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment recycling (WEEE). 

Confidentiality 

The  Group’s  policies  emphasise  the  need  for  confidentiality  to  be  maintained  in  all  our  business  activities.  Maintaining 
confidentiality  is  a  critical  part  of  our  culture.  Our  policy  and  practices  help  to  ensure  that  all  staff  understand  what 
constitutes confidential information and restricts internal access based on a “need to know basis”. 

Information relating to third parties is not disclosed without the third parties’ written consent. Where the Group conducts 
work for customers, including government agencies, where specific confidentiality requirements exist such as The Official 
Secrets Act, process and procedures are in place to ensure the Group complies with these requirements. 

G S Marsh 
Chief Executive Officer 
27 July 2022 

26 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

Statement of compliance against the UK Corporate Governance Guidance 

The Board of Directors believes in high standards of corporate governance and is responsible for ensuring that the Group 
has in place appropriate governance practices and is accountable to shareholders for the Group’s performance in this area. 

Solid  State  PLC,  as  a  quoted  company  on  AIM,  a  market  operated  by  The  London  Stock  Exchange  PLC,  is  required  in 
accordance with AIM rule 26 to adopt a corporate governance code. Solid State PLC has chosen to adopt the QCA corporate 
governance code (the “Code”) over the FRCs UK Corporate Governance Code.  

In  adopting  the  Code,  the  Directors  have  provided  corporate  governance  disclosures  and  explain  how  the  Group  and 
company adopt the ten principles of the Code in a manner that is considered appropriate. The Code is available on the QCA 
website at: www.theqca.com.    

This  statement  describes  how  the  Group  is  applying  the  relevant  principles  of  governance,  as  set  out  in  the  Code. 
Throughout the year ended 31 March 2022, the Group has applied the principles of the Code. In adopting the  Code, the 
Board has also been cognisant of the guidance issued from other regulatory bodies in respect of best practice corporate 
governance such as the FRC to ensure that the governance framework adopted at Solid State PLC is rigorous, robust and 
appropriate for its size and structure.  

How the corporate governance principles are adopted at Solid State PLC 

The Board considers that throughout 2021/22, Solid State PLC has sought to comply with the “Ten Principles” within the 
code and this report sets out how the Board has done this through the year. This statement addresses the main subject 
areas of the Code namely; delivering growth, maintaining a dynamic management framework, and building trust. 

Principle 

Compliance 
status 

Explanation 

Further disclosure(s) 

Delivering growth 
Principle 1: -“Establish a 
strategy and business 
model which promote 
long-term value for 
shareholders” 

Principle 2: - “Seek to 
understand and meet 
shareholder needs and 
expectations” 

Fully 
compliant 

Fully 
compliant 

Group business strategy is set out 
in the Chairman’s statement and 
the Strategic Review above.  

See the Chairman’s Statement 
on pages 3 to 5 and Strategic 
review on pages 6 to 22. 

Strategic issues, and the 
appropriate business model to 
exploit opportunities and mitigate 
risks, are under continuous review 
by the Board. 

Regular meetings are held with 
shareholders at the release of 
interim and full year results, the 
AGM and a number of additional 
ad hoc meetings. 

See further reporting on the 
stakeholder engagement 
provided on page 30 to 31 and 
page 37 to 38 of this report and 
pages 24 to 26 of the corporate 
and social responsibility report.  

Fully 
compliant 

Principle 3: - “Take into 
account wider 
stakeholder and social 
responsibilities and their 
implications for long-term 
success” 

Directors and the management 
team adopt a broad view during 
decision making to take 
meaningful account of the impact 
of its business activities on all key 
stakeholder groups. 

See further reporting on the 
stakeholder engagement 
provided on page 30 to 31  of 
this report and pages 24 to 26 of 
the corporate and social 
responsibility report. 

27 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Compliance 
status 

Fully 
compliant 

Principle 

Principle 4: - “Embed 
effective risk 
management, 
considering both 
opportunities and 
threats, throughout the 
organisation” 

Explanation 

Further disclosure(s) 

The Group operates a system of 
internal controls to safeguard 
Group assets and protect the 
business from identified risks.  

These controls are subject to 
examination during the annual 
external audit process. 

See the principal and emerging 
risks identified and the 
mitigation and the report on its 
risk management processes on 
pages 38 to 40 of this report and 
on pages 12 to 16 of the 
strategic report. 

See the Board and its sub 
committees’ section in this 
report on page 34 to 37. 

See the Board section in this 
report on pages 34 to 37. 

Maintain a dynamic management framework 
Principle 5: - “Maintain 
the Board as a well-
functioning, balanced 
team led by the chair” 

Fully 
compliant 

At the year-end the Board 
comprises the Non-Executive 
Chairman; Mr N Rogers, the Chief 
Executive Officer; Mr G S Marsh, 
three Executive Directors and two 
Non-Executive Directors.  The 
board intends to appoint an 
additional independent non-
executive director during the 
coming year. 

Compliant 

Principle 6: - “ensure that 
between them the 
Directors have the 
necessary up-to-date 
experience, skills and 
capabilities” 

The Board is satisfied that the 
current composition provides the 
required degree of skills, 
experience, diversity, and 
capabilities and conducted 
continued professional 
development appropriate to the 
needs of the business.  In 
appointing an additional 
independent non-executive 
director in the coming year, 
candidates offering greater 
breadth of diversity will be actively 
encouraged. 

Principle 7: - “Evaluate 
Board performance 
based on clear and 
relevant objectives, 
seeking continuous 
improvement” 

Fully 
compliant 

The Board completes an annual 
internal evaluation of performance 
which is led by the Chairman.  

See the Board performance 
evaluation section in this report 
on page 37. 

The Chairman also actively 
encourages self-evaluation by all 
Board members, and feedback on 
the conduct and content of board 
meetings.  

The Board will continue to keep 
under review whether a more 
structured independent review is 
required in future. 

28 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Principle 

Principle 8: - “promote a 
corporate culture that is 
based on ethical values and 
behaviours” 

Compliance 
status 

Fully 
compliant 

Explanation 

Further disclosure(s) 

The Board expects high ethical and 
moral standards. The Board and all 
employees expected to be 
accountable for their actions and 
in compliance with the Company 
handbook. Employees are actively 
encouraged to participate in 
training courses and maintain CPD. 

See the Board section in this 
report on pages 34 to 37 and 
the corporate and social 
responsibility report on pages 
24 to 26. 

Principle 9: - “Maintain 
governance structures and 
processes that are fit for 
purpose and support good 
decision-making by the 
Board” 

Fully 
compliant 

The Board as a whole take 
responsibility for ensuring 
appropriate corporate governance 
practices are adopted.  

See the Board section in this 
report on pages 34 to 37 and 
the audit committee report on 
pages 41 to 45. 

Fully 
compliant 

Building trust 
Principle 10: -  
“Communicate how the 
company is governed and is 
performing by maintaining 
a dialogue with 
shareholders and other 
relevant stakeholders” 

The roles and responsibilities of 
each of the Directors (including 
committee memberships) are 
clearly defined. 

Regular meetings with 
shareholders and other key 
stakeholder groups provide a 
specific opportunity for raising any 
concerns related to corporate 
governance, including any 
significant votes cast against or 
abstaining from shareholder 
resolutions. 

Further narrative disclosure is 
provided in: this report on 
pages 30 to 39, the corporate 
and social responsibility report 
on pages 24 to 26 and the 
Remuneration Committee 
report on pages 46 to 58. 

The Board views maintaining high standards in its governance and management of the affairs of the Group as a fundamental 
part of discharging its stewardship responsibilities.  

Accordingly, both the Board and the Audit Committee continue to keep under review the Group’s whole system of internal 
control, which comprises not only financial controls but also operational controls, compliance and risk management.  

This process was in place throughout the 2022 financial year and accords with the Revised Guidance for Directors on Risk 
Management, Internal Control and Related Financial & Business Reporting (formerly called the Turnbull Guidance). 

29 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

How Solid State PLC has complied with the Companies Act Section 172 requirements and disclosures 

The following disclosure describes how the Directors have acted in the way they consider, in good faith, would be most 
likely  to  promote  the  success  of  the  company  for  the  benefit  of  its  members  as  a  whole,  and  in  doing  so  have  regard 
(amongst other matters) to the factors set out in section 172(1)(a) to (f). 

When performing their duties under section 172 of the Companies Act, they have considered the long-term consequences 
of decisions, matters affecting the Company’s employees and other stakeholder relationships, and the need to act fairly 
between members of the Company. 

Furthermore, they have recognised that companies are run for the benefit of their shareholders, but that the long-term 
success of a business is dependent on maintaining relationships with all significant stakeholders. The Board continuously 
reviews relationships that support the generation and preservation of value in the Company. These relationships include 
those with employees, suppliers, customers and industrial partners, and the Group’s bankers. 

Stakeholder engagement 

Stakeholder 

Engagement method 

Investors 

The key investors identified are the shareholders and lenders. The major interests in 
the Group’s shares are set out in page 38 of the corporate governance report.  

Key metrics for both the Group’s bank and shareholders are the share price, adjusted 
profit before taxation, adjusted earnings per share, cash generation and net debt. 

Through the publication of half year and full year financial reports and the Group’s 
engagement with shareholders and the bank it looks to provide insight where possible 
into the Group strategy and how the Group aims to create value for its shareholders by 
delivering strong and sustainable results that translate into earnings and cash. 

The Group seeks to promote an investor base that is interested in a long term holding 
in the company. Further disclosure of how management engage with the Group’s 
Investors is set out in the corporate governance report. 

Disclosure 
cross ref  

Pages 27 –
40 

Employees 

Employees are those individuals who are contracted to work for the company both full 
and part time. 

Pages 25 –
26 

The Group’s success is reliant on retaining the knowledgeable and skilled workforce 
who are committed to the Group and the delivery of the strategy; maintaining and 
delivering on the high standards that the Group sets for itself. 

The Group has policies and procedures in place to look after the welfare of its 
employees. The Board is proud of the “Solid State family” culture which is friendly and 
supportive of all members of the team. 

Given the nature of the business, health and safety is taken extremely seriously and 
ensuring a best practice safe working environment is essential. Employee engagement 
is promoted from the top down, encouraging employees to share ideas and to help the 
Group deliver on its goal of continuous improvement.  

The knowledge and ability of the teams is a critical cornerstone of the Group’s value. 
Therefore, the Group promotes, encourages, and offers training where it is considered 
beneficial to the employee and the company. Further disclosures are provided in the 
corporate and social responsibility report. 

30 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Stakeholder 

Engagement method 

Customers 
and 
Industrial 
Partners 

The Group uses its teams’ knowledge and ability to work collaboratively with customers 
and industrial partners to provide a tailored component, product, or service to meet 
their specific requirements and add value. 

The Group always aims to design, manufacture, and supply products of the highest 
quality. This differentiates the Group’s offering in terms of how the Group engages with 
its customers and the relationships it builds in providing a tailored solution. 

To meet these objectives the Group ensures that its teams have the knowledge and 
expertise to meet or exceed the expectations of its customers and industrial partners.  

The Group’s customer engagements help to focus where the Group invests in R&D to 
enable the Group to deliver relevant and continuously evolving technical solutions. 

Further disclosures are provided in the corporate and social responsibility report. 

Disclosure 
cross ref  

Pages 24 –
26 

Suppliers 

The Group’s extensive supply chain relationships with component manufacturers are 
critical to ensuring that the Group can meet the customers’ technical requirements for 
their specific application.  

Pages 24 –
26 

The Group’s supplier relationships and partnerships are underpinned by the technical 
knowledge that its team has of the components which the Group distributes and 
designs into its manufactured solutions. As a result, the teams’ relationships with the 
Group’s suppliers are a critical part of both the suppliers’ and the Group’s success. 

The Group regularly engage with the Group’s suppliers to discuss performance, price 
and how to continue to improve the Group’s supply chain relationships to deliver 
mutual benefit.  

While there are global shortages within the semiconductor electronics industry supply 
chain managing these relationships is critical, and the strength of engagement will help 
to ensure the Group manages the supply and demand in the times of shortage as 
effectively as possible. 

Key topics of engagement for the year were price and supply with the challenges that 
Brexit, COVID-19 and most significantly the global semiconductor material shortages 
are causing. Where possible the Group extended order schedules with suppliers as early 
as 2020, even when customers were not providing the same scheduled visibility, and 
plans were made with suppliers to look to minimise any supply chain disruption. 

Further disclosures are provided in the corporate and social responsibility report. 

31 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Principal decisions linked to our strategy and the stake holders impacted 

Principal 
decision 

Setting of 
annual 
financial 
budget and 
periodic 
updating of 
forecasts 

Basis of the decision and conclusion 

The  Board  receives  regular  financial  reports  from  the  executive  management,  both 
historic and forward looking. The Board endeavours to meet or exceed all stakeholder 
expectations where possible. Based on this the Board issues appropriate stakeholder 
and market communication through relevant channels. 

Pleasingly,  during  the  financial  year  ending  31  March  2022  the  Board  has  seen 
significant commercial progress and have been able to significantly exceed the adjusted 
profit  before  tax  expectations  set  at  the  beginning  of  the  financial  year  with  £7.2m 
reported in this annual report. 

The  annual  financial  budget  for  2023  for  the  Group  was  approved  in  March  2022, 
indicating  a  reasonable  view  that  the  results  for  the  financial  year  would  meet  or 
exceed market expectation, albeit there are continued risks associated with potential 
impact of electronics supply chain shortages.   

Based on a solid start to the year with minimal adverse supply chain impacts to date, 
the Board remained confident to continue to provide investor guidance for the year 
ahead  which  is  reflected  in  the  notes  published  by  the  analyst  and  shared  on  the 
Group’s website. 

Primary 
Stakeholders  

Shareholders, 
lenders, 
employees 

Changes to 
Board 

The Directors seek to ensure that the composition of the Board is appropriate to the 
current  circumstances  and  has  enough  capacity  to  manage  growth  and  succession 
planning. 

Shareholders, 
employees 

The Directors are satisfied that the current board structure and composition offers an 
appropriate balance between executive and non-executive directors, a broad diversity 
of thought, approach and background, and an environment of constructive challenge.  

In seeking to buttress compliance with the code on Corporate Governance, the board 
considers it appropriate to seek an additional independent non-executive director in 
the coming year, with enhanced gender and/or ethnic diversity a significant factor in 
selecting an appropriate candidate. 

Acquire 
Custom 
Power 

The Group actively sought to acquire a battery pack producer with a profitable, cash 
generating business model in markets aligned to the existing Group. There were limited 
options that fulfilled these criteria, however Custom Power meet this criterion.  

This transaction delivers on all the Groups strategic goals 

• 

Internationalisation,  given  the  strong  position  in  the  US  market  and  a 
manufacturing partner in Mexico.   

•  Own Brand products and technology advancement as the business is active in 
the growth markets of Industrial, Medical and Defence and are the market 
leader of high reliability battery pack solutions for drones in the USA. 
 Talent  development,  given  the  strong  engineering  capabilities  and  battery 
industry expertise.  

• 

Custom Power has complementary strengths to the existing Crewkerne power business 
unit in the Systems Division, providing an opportunity to supply blue chip customers in 
the key territories of North America and Europe. 

Based  on  rigorous  due  diligence  the  board  made  the  decision  to  proceed  with  the 
transaction  having  renegotiated  the  deal  to  factor  in  the  changes  in  the  macro-
economic environment and the confidence in the capital markets. Full details of this 
acquisition are set out in the circular issued to shareholders on the 13 July 2022. 

32 

Employees, 
customers, 
commercial 
partners and 
shareholders 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
Primary 
Stakeholders 

All 

Employees, 
Customers and 
commercial 
partners 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Principal decision  Basis of the decision and conclusion 

Banking facilities 

Mitigation of 
component 
shortages 

The Group has a proactive and constructive relationship with its bankers, Lloyds 
Bank  PLC.  In  March  2022,  Lloyds  agreed  to  extend  the  term  of  the  Group’s 
£7.5m  revolving  credit  facility  to  30  November  2023  to  maintain  funding 
flexibility. The facility is subject to financial covenants which are assessed on a 
six monthly basis. 

Term loan facilities totalling £13m have also been agreed, subject to completion 
of the Custom Power acquisition, subsequent to year end. 

It  became  clear  in  2020/21  that  component  supply  shortages  were  going  to 
become a global issue in the semiconductor electronics sector in particular. The 
Board evaluated the options available at that point in time to try to manage and 
mitigate the issues wherever possible. The Board concluded that the Group was 
well positioned to make strategic investments by placing scheduled orders. In 
many  cases  these  were  non-cancellable,  non-refundable  orders  to  secure 
inventories.  

Shortages  and  lead-time  increases  have  continued  throughout  the  2021/22 
financial year and are expected to persist throughout 2022/23. The risk has the 
potential  to  adversely  impact  performance,  however,  is  mitigated  by  the 
deliberate decision to continue to invest in working capital to secure supply to 
enable delivery of the open orderbook. The Group has sought to manage the 
increased  requirement  for  proforma  supplier  payments 
in  advance  by 
establishing  similar  payment  terms  with  customers  to  mitigate  the  working 
capital impact.  

Continued  unprecedented  demand  coupled  with  the  massive  supply  chain 
disruptions  mean  that  this  is  a  risk  that  will  continue  to  need  careful 
management. The component sourcing team is a particularly valuable resource 
for the Group and its customers as product becomes difficult to source.  Their 
expertise is helping to secure product for the Group’s customers, albeit in some 
cases at premium prices. 

33 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

The Board  

The  structure  and  composition  of  the  Board  has  been  undergoing  a  process  of  evolutionary  change  since  Nigel’s 
appointment as the first truly independent non-executive director in 2019.  Since that time, this process has continued with 
the addition of Pete Magowan as Senior Independent Director and Nigel’s appointment as Chairman in November 2020.  
Whilst Peter Haining does not strictly meet all the criteria for an independent director set out in the QCA guidelines, we 
continue to consider that he actively fosters an attitude of independence of character and judgement at all times. The QCA 
guidelines acknowledge for growing companies it may not be possible for Boards to meet the definition of “independence” 
for  all  Non-Executive  Directors  and  sets  out  the  fact  that  if  a  Director  has  served  for more  than  nine  years  it  does  not 
automatically affect independence. 

The  Board  is  mindful  of  the  threats  to  independence  and  actively  manages  the  potential  risk  to  ensure  that  the  Non-
Executives provide independent constructive challenge. The terms and conditions of appointment of the Non-Executive 
Directors are available for inspection upon request to the Company Secretary.  

Rules concerning the appointment and replacement of Directors of the Group are contained in the Articles of Association 
(“Articles”). Amendments to the Articles must be approved by a special resolution of shareholders. Under the Articles, all 
Directors are subject to election by shareholders at the first Annual General Meeting following their appointment, and to 
re-election thereafter at intervals of no more than three years. 

The Board has considered the FRC’s guidance to companies outside the FTSE 350 to consider the annual re-election of all 
Directors and considers that this is now appropriate to the Group’s circumstances and will do so from the upcoming Annual 
General Meeting and in future.  Biographies of the Directors are set out on page 61. These show the range of business and 
financial experience upon which the Board can call. 

The Board’s goal is to ensure that its membership should be balanced between Executives and Non-Executives and have 
the appropriate skills and experience and knowledge of the business. At present, there is not a majority of Non-Executives, 
however  it  is  the  intention  of  the  Board  to  seek  to  appoint  an  additional  independent  Non-Executive  director  in  the 
upcoming year to redress this balance, with the Chairman continuing to exercise a  casting vote in the unlikely event of 
deadlock.  The Directors have also indicated their intention to ensure that candidates who can offer enhanced diversity, 
including gender or ethnic background, will be actively encouraged in an open and transparent process. 

The Board recognises the special position and role of the Chairman under the Code and has approved the formal division 
of responsibilities between the Chairman and Chief Executive Officer.  The Chairman is responsible for the leadership of the 
Board and ensuring its effectiveness, and the Chief Executive Officer manages the Group and has the prime role, with the 
assistance of the Board, of developing and implementing business strategy. 

One of the roles of the Non-Executive Directors under the leadership of the Chairman is to undertake detailed examination 
and discussion of the strategies proposed by the Executive Directors, so as to ensure that decisions are in the best long 
term interests of shareholders and take proper account of the interests of the Group’s other stakeholders.  

The Chairman ensures that meetings of Non-Executive Directors without the Executive Directors are held. 

34 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

How the Board operates 

The  Board  meets  regularly  through  the  year  and  is  provided  with  appropriate  strategic,  operational,  and  financial 
information prior to each meeting with monthly reports to enable it to monitor the performance of the Group. 

Directors are required to devote such time and effort to their duties as is required to secure their proper discharge and, for 
Non-Executive Directors, this typically entails one or two days of meetings per month as well as reading and preparation 
time. 

At Board meetings the Chairman ensures that all Directors are able to make an effective contribution and every Director is 
encouraged to participate and provide their perspective and opinions. The Chairman always seeks to achieve unanimous 
decisions of the Board following due discussion of agenda items. 

All Directors have direct access to the advice and services of the Company Secretary who is responsible for ensuring that 
Board procedures are followed and are allowed to take independent professional advice if necessary, at the Company’s 
expense. 

The Board has a formal schedule of matters referred to it for decision. This list includes appropriate strategic, financial, 
organisational  and  compliance  issues,  including  the  approval  of  high  level  announcements,  circulars,  the  report  and 
accounts and certain strategic and management issues. 

Examples of such items include but are not limited to: 

• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 

the approval of interim and annual results; 
the approval of the annual budget; 
approval of acquisitions or disposals; 
approval of major items of capital expenditure; 
the approval of significant contracts; 
approval of changes to corporate or capital structure; and, 
financial issues, including changes in accounting policy, the approval of dividends, bank facilities and guarantees. 

Committees of the Board 

Executive Committee 

The Executive Committee consists of the Executive Directors under the chairmanship of Mr G S Marsh and is responsible 
for the development of strategy, annual budgets and operating plans linked to the management and control of the day-to-
day operations of the Group. 

The Executive Committee is also responsible for monitoring key commercial opportunities and relationships, day to day 
stakeholder engagement and for ensuring that the Board policies are carried out on a Group-wide basis. 

Nominations Committee 

The Nominations Committee is formed when required as a sub-committee of the Board. The Nominations committee was 
not required during the current financial year, but will lead the process of appointing an additional Non-Executive director 
in the coming year. The members of the Committee would be Mr G Marsh, Mr P Magowan, Mr N Rogers and Mr P Haining. 

The Nominations committee will take responsibility for identifying the skills, experience, personal qualities and capabilities 
required for the next stage in the company’s development, linked to the company’s strategy.  

35 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Audit Committee 

The  Audit  Committee  consists  of  the  Non-Executive  Directors;  Mr  P  Haining,  Mr  P  Magowan  and  Mr  N  Rogers.  The 
Committee meets at least twice a year under the Chairmanship of Mr P Haining, who the Board has evaluated to have 
recent relevant financial experience.  

The  Chairman  of  the  Audit  Committee  is  not  deemed  independent  by  virtue  of  his  length  of  service  and  that  he  has 
previously  held  an  Executive  position.  However,  given  that  the  Board  considers  that  Mr  P  Haining  fulfils  the  role  with 
independence of character and judgement, the Board has concluded that it is appropriate to retain the financial experience 
and knowledge of the business possessed by Mr P Haining in his role as Chairman of the Audit Committee for the time 
being.  If there is a candidate identified during the process to appoint an additional Non-Executive director who has the 
necessary skills and experience, then they may also be offered the opportunity to Chair the Audit Committee following an 
appropriate handover period.  

The Audit Committee has specific written terms of reference which deal with its authority and responsibilities and these 
are available for inspection from the Company Secretary. Its duties include monitoring internal controls throughout the 
Group,  approving  the  Group’s  accounting  policies,  and  reviewing  the  Group’s  interim  results  and  full  year  financial 
statements before submission to the full Board. The Audit Committee also reviews and approves the scope and content of 
the  Group’s  annual  risk  assessment  programme  and  the  annual  audit  and  monitors  the  independence  of  the  external 
auditors. 

The Audit Committee acts to ensure that the financial performance of the Group is properly recorded and monitored, in 
fulfilling their role they meet annually with the auditors and review the reports from the auditors relating to accounts and 
internal control systems.  

The Group does not have an independent Internal Audit function, as it is not considered appropriate given the scale of the 
Group’s operations, however the Group operates internal peer reviews, with a scope of evaluating and testing the Group’s 
financial  control  procedures,  to  standardise  processes  around  best  practice.  Any  significant  issues  are  reported  to  the 
Chairman of the Audit Committee and shared with the external auditors as appropriate. 

The Group CFO and the external auditors attend meetings of the Audit Committee by invitation. The Committee also holds 
separate meetings with the external auditors, as appropriate.  

Remuneration Committee 

The Remuneration Committee consists of Mr P Magowan, Mr N Rogers and Mr P Haining. The Committee meets at least 
twice a year under the Chairmanship of Mr P Magowan.  

The  Chief  Executive  Officer  and  Group  CFO  have  attended  some  of  the  meetings  of  the  Remuneration  Committee  by 
invitation to respond to questions raised by the Committee, but they are excluded from any matter concerning the details 
of their own remuneration. 

The  Remuneration  Committee  has  specific  terms  of  reference  which  deal  with  its  authority  and  duties  and  these  are 
available for inspection from the Company Secretary. 

The purpose of the committee is to review the performance of the full time Executive Directors and to set the scale and 
structure  of  their  remuneration  and  the  basis  of  their  service  agreements  with  due  regard  to  the  interests  of  the 
shareholders. In fulfilling this responsibility, the Remuneration Committee is responsible for setting salaries, incentives and 
other benefit arrangements of Executive Directors and overseeing the Group’s employee share schemes. 

Members  of  the  Remuneration  Committee  do  not  participate  in  decisions  concerning their  own  remuneration.  Further 
details are provided in the remuneration report on pages 46 to 58. 

36 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Attendance at meetings 

Number of meetings in 2021/22 

Attendance 

Executive 

Mr G Marsh 

Mr J Macmichael 

Mr M Richards 

Mr P James 

Non-executive 

Mr N Rogers 

Mr P Haining 

Mr P Magowan   

Board  Nominations 
Committee 

Audit 
Committee 

Remuneration 
Committee 

000 

9 

9 

9 

9 

9 

9 

9 

9 

0 

3 

2 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

3 

3 

3 

3 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

2 

2 

2 

Board performance evaluation 

The Chief Executive reviews the performance of the Executive Directors on a periodic basis and reports to the Remuneration 
Committee. 

The  performance  of  the  Directors,  the  Chairman  and  of  the  Board  are  monitored  on  an  ongoing  basis.  Annually  the 
Remuneration Committee evaluates performance as part of the review of remuneration and discretionary bonus awards. 

The Board completes an internal annual Board performance evaluation led by the Chairman. 

The appraisal covers: composition; processes; behaviours; and activities and aims to develop the Board and the individuals 
on the Board, promoting Board effectiveness and the implementation of Group strategy. 

The current year has seen very positive progress against its strategy, with the trading performance ahead of the Board’s 
expectations.  

Shareholder relations 

The Board regards regular communications with shareholders as one of its key responsibilities. During 2021/22, the Chief 
Executive Officer and Group CFO met with institutional investors on a regular basis to discuss the Group’s performance, the 
shareholder’s views, and to ensure that the strategies and objectives of the Group are well understood. In addition, the 
Chairman  engaged  with  the  company’s  advisors  and  a  select  group  of  shareholders  to  discuss  matters  of  Corporate 
Governance. 

The Chief Executive Officer keeps the Board fully informed of any significant matters discussed with shareholders and of 
shareholders’ views. In addition, the Board receives copies of the analysts’ reports which the Company is made aware of. 

The Non-Executive Directors, having considered the Code, are of the view that this approach to shareholder communication 
remains  appropriate  for  the  Group.  However,  should  shareholders  have  concerns  which  they  feel  cannot  be  resolved 
through normal shareholder meetings, the Chairman, and the Senior Independent Directors may be contacted through the 
Company Secretary. 

37 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Shareholder relations cont’ 

Interim  and  full  year-end  shareholder  roadshows  are  held  by  the  Executive  Directors  together  with  on-line  investor 
meetings  on  the  “Investor  Meet  Company”  platform  (www.investormeetcompany.com).  Traditionally  the  Company 
arranged  investor  site  visits  typically  twice  a  year  subject  to  sufficient  demand.  These  events  enable  shareholders  and 
potential shareholders to understand first-hand the business, visit the operations and meet the wider team.  Furthermore, 
shareholders attending the AGM are invited  to ask the Directors questions about  the business. Other than  the  Group’s 
routine engagement with investors on topics of strategy, governance and performance, the other specific matter discussed 
with key shareholders included changes to the Board and the Director remuneration policy.   

The Company also maintains the Group’s website, which provides details of the Group’s business including its strategy, 
technologies, operations, and products. The Group website has a separate investor relations section which provides the 
Group’s news flow, share price information, and financial reports including the annual and interim reports. Hard copies of 
these financial reports are also available by request. The website can be found at: www.solidstateplc.com. 

In accordance with the recommendations of the Code, the Company will advise shareholders attending the AGM of the 
number of proxy votes lodged in respect of each resolution, analysed between ‘For’, ‘Against’, ‘at the Chairman’s discretion’ 
and ‘abstentions’. These are advised after the resolutions have been dealt with on a show of hands, providing that a poll 
has not been called for or required. 

Significant Shareholders 

Shareholders over 3%* 

Schroders 

Seguro Nominees Limited 

Mrs B Marsh 

Charles Stanley & Co 

BGF Investment Management Limited 

Canaccord Genuity Group Inc 

Mr G Comben 

Mrs J Comben 

Liontrust Asset Management 

Mr G Marsh 

% holding 

9.84% 

6.97% 

6.44% 

6.11% 

5.89% 

4.57% 

4.27% 

4.27% 

4.23% 

3.29% 

*Significant shareholders that the Board has been notified of as of 12 May 2022. The Solid State PLC website is kept updated for notified changes during the year. 

Audit and Accountability 

The Code requires that Directors review the effectiveness of the Group’s system of internal controls on a continuing basis. 
The  scope  of  the  review  covers  all  key  controls  including  financial,  operational  and  compliance  controls  as  well  as  risk 
management. 

The  Board  has  put  in  place  a  framework  of  internal  controls  to  manage  the  risks  faced  by  the  Group  and  the  Audit 
Committee has responsibility to review, monitor and make policy recommendations to the Board upon all such matters. 

The Directors acknowledge their responsibility for the Group’s system of internal control. The Board, through the Audit 
Committee, keeps this system under continuous review and formally considers its content and its effectiveness on a bi-
annual basis. In completing their review of the effectiveness of the Group’s system of internal controls the Audit Committee 
has taken account  of any material developments up to the date of the signing of the financial statements. In addition, 
recognition is given to the external audit findings, which help to inform the Committee’s views of areas of increased risk. 

38 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Audit and Accountability – cont’ 

The system of internal control comprises those controls established to provide assurance that the assets of the Group are 
safeguarded against unauthorised use or disposal and to ensure the maintenance of proper accounting records and the 
reliability of financial information used within the business or for publication. 

Any system of internal control can only provide reasonable, but not absolute, assurance against material misstatement or 
loss, as it is designed to manage rather than to eliminate the risk of failing to achieve the business objectives of the Group. 

The Directors acknowledge their responsibility for preparing the Annual Report and Accounts. The Audit Committee reviews 
the  Group’s  reporting  processes  with  the  aim  of  ensuring  that  the  financial  reporting,  when  taken  as  a  whole,  is  fair, 
balanced, and understandable, and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s position 
and performance, business model and strategy. 

Risk Management 

The Board reviews and approves an Annual Budget and Business Plan prior to the start of each financial year. This includes 
reviewing the key strategic, operational, and financial objectives for the year, together with a detailed financial budget. 

The Executive Committee is accountable to the Board for delivery of the Annual Business Plan. To provide a framework for 
the delivery of the Group’s strategy and plans, the Executive Committee has developed an organisational structure with 
clear roles and responsibilities and clear lines of reporting. The Executives report performance against the plan on a monthly 
basis, which includes detailed analysis of budgetary variances and updated financial projections. 

Each  Executive  Director  is  responsible  for  identifying  and  managing  the  risks  relating  to  their  respective  areas  of 
responsibility, including the risks relating to strategy, the Annual Business Plan and day-to-day business. In addition to day-
to-day risk management the Executive Directors formally assess the major business risks and evaluate their potential impact 
on the Group. These risks and the reporting of the risk assessment is included in the strategic report on pages 12 to 16. 

Internal Control  

In respect of internal controls, the Directors are continually reviewing the effectiveness of the systems of internal controls. 
The  key  elements  of  which,  having  regard  to  the  size  of  the  Group,  are  that  the  Board  meets  regularly  and  takes  the 
decisions  on  all  material  matters.  The  organisational  structure  ensures  that  responsibilities  are  defined,  authority  only 
delegated where appropriate and that the regular management accounts are presented to the Board wherein the financial 
performance of the Group is analysed. 

Further details over the internal controls are set out in the Audit Committee report on page 41 to 45. 

The Directors acknowledge that they are responsible for the system of internal control, which is established in order to 
safeguard the assets, maintain proper accounting records and ensure that financial information used within the business 
or published is reliable. Any such system of control can, however, only provide reasonable, not absolute assurance against 
material misstatement or loss. 

Going Concern 

In assessing the going concern position of the Group for the Consolidated Financial Statements for the year ended 31 March 
2022, the Directors have considered the Group’s cash flows, liquidity and business activities. At 31 March 2022, the Group 
had cash balances of £2.9m, a drawn term revolving credit facility (RCF) of £1.5m and £6.0m of undrawn RCF.  

Given  the  announcement  of  the  expected  acquisition  of  Custom  Power  post  year  end  additional  term  loan  facilities  of 
£13.0m have been made available by Lloyds bank. In assessing going concern, the board have considered both that the 
transaction goes ahead and alternatively that it does not proceed, however the board expectation is that the transaction 
will proceed following the meeting on the 29 July 2022. 

The bank facilities are subject to financial covenants requiring the business to be EBITDA positive therefore this facility is 
available to fund investment in working capital, capital investment or acquisition activities. Should the business face such 
a  significant  downturn that it was loss making the facility would not be available to be drawn to fund additional losses 
without a covenant waiver of amendment. As a result, in evaluating a stressed model the Board have only included the RCF 
in the headroom to the extent it would be available within the covenants. 

39 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Going Concern – Cont’ 

Based on the Group’s forecasts, the Directors have adopted the going concern basis in preparing the Financial Statements. 
The Directors have made this assessment after consideration of the Group’s cash flows and related assumptions and in 
accordance with the Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting 2014, 
the April 2016 guidance on Going concern basis of accounting and reporting on solvency and liquidity risks and the various 
guidance issued in 2020 all published by the UK Financial Reporting Council to provide support to  Directors and Board in 
making the assessment of going concern.  

Additional disclosures in respect of the Directors’ assessment and modelling to support the conclusions below are set out 
on pages 76 and 77 of the basis of preparation.  

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence 
for  the  next  12  months,  therefore  it  is  appropriate  to  adopt  a  going  concern  basis  for the  preparation  of  the  Financial 
Statements. Accordingly, these financial statements do not include any adjustments to the carrying amount or classification 
of assets and liabilities that would result if the Group and Company were unable to continue as a going concern. 

Long term viability statement 

The Directors have assessed the viability of the Group considering the Group’s current position and the potential impact of 
the principal and emerging risks documented above that would threaten its business model, future performance, solvency, 
or liquidity. As set out in the Going Concern assessment above, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group 
has adequate resources to continue in operation for the next 12 months and that the Company will be able to continue in 
operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due.  

The Directors have determined that a two year period to 31 March 2024 is an appropriate period over which to assess its 
viability statement. This is based on the significant amount of change that can arise over two years in the electronic and 
optoelectronics market; the Group’s business; and, in the macro-economic environment. This has been validated by the 
impact that electronic component shortages have had on the Group’s business, the electronics industry across the World.  

The Board carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks facing the Group, including those that would threaten its 
growth drivers, future performance, solvency, or liquidity.  

As noted above the Board has also performed specific stress testing on the impact of the component shortages might have 
on future performance. The impact of component shortages is affecting many of the principal risks detailed above and as 
such is the most  significant  factor impacting near and mid-term  future financial performance. Although the Company’s 
response to the component shortages continues to be management’s key focus at this time, the Directors consider the mid 
and longer term opportunity in the UK Systems and Components businesses will remain very strong. 

The outputs from these reviews were then used to perform liquidity analysis on the strategic plan, the downside sensitivity 
reviews that were based on principal risks, which concluded the business is viable even under down side stress testing. 

The expectation over the strength of the market is supported by the significant structural technological drivers including: 
Connectivity, 5G, Sensing AI , Big data, and Green tech supporting net zero targets, where the electronic and opto-electronic 
component & manufactured solutions the Group provides are expected to be critical elements of these enhancements. This 
alignment with the Group’s strategy and core capabilities means that the Board consider that the Group will be very well 
placed to take advantage of these macro-opportunities once the adverse impact of the component shortages is overcome. 

G S Marsh 
Chief Executive Officer 
27 July 2022 

40 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT 

The Audit Committee is chaired by Mr P Haining FCA, a  Chartered Accountant. He is considered by the Board and Audit 
Committee to have the necessary current relevant financial knowledge, qualifications, and experience for this role. 

In accordance with the QCA guidance the Board has reviewed and evaluated Mr P Haining’s performance as a Non-Executive 
Director and confirm that he remains independent in terms of both his character, his judgement and based on how he 
conducts himself as a Non-Executive Director and chair of the Audit Committee. 

Therefore,  given  the  knowledge,  experience  and  skills  of  Mr  P  Haining  the  Board  consider  that  he  remains  the  most 
appropriate member of the Board to Chair the Audit Committee. 

Primary responsibilities of the audit committee: 

•  Reviewing the effectiveness of the Group’s procedures for the identification, assessment  and reporting of risk, 

financial reporting processes and internal control policies.  

•  Managing the relationship with the auditors to ensure that the external audit is effective, objective, independent 
and of a high quality. Furthermore, the Audit Committee ensures that the scope of the audit, the auditors’ terms 
of engagement, and fees are reasonable and appropriate. 
Considering whether there is a need for an internal audit function and make a recommendation to the Board  as 
to  what  is  appropriate  for  the  Board  to  gain  assurance  over  the  financial  processes,  procedures,  controls  and 
reporting of the Group. 

• 

•  Reviewing significant  financial reporting issues, accounting policies, and judgements and estimates adopted by 
management  and  monitoring  the  integrity  of  the  Group’s  financial  statements  independently  of  the  Executive 
Directors and external auditors. 

•  Advising the Board on whether the Committee believes the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, are 
fair, balanced and understandable and provide the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group 
and Company’s performance, business model and strategy. 

Activities during the year: 

The Audit Committee met three times during the year. The meetings were also attended by the Group CFO, Group FC, and 
representatives of the Group’s external auditors by invitation. 

At meetings attended by the external auditors, time is allowed for the Audit Committee to discuss issues with the external 
auditors without the Group CFO or Group FC being present. 

As part of the Audit Committee’s review process, the Chairman of the Audit Committee and the Group CFO normally visit 
each of the  Group’s major business units across the year to review and challenge the local management  on their draft 
financial results however given the continuing impact of the COVID-19 Pandemic this year this has been conducted through 
a combination of face-to-face meetings and remotely via MS Teams.  

The Chairman reports his observations from these reviews to the Audit Committee and the Board as part of the process for 
approving of the Annual Report and Accounts. 

The Committee operates under formal terms of reference, and these are reviewed annually. An annual rolling agenda is 
used to ensure that all matters within the Audit Committee’s Terms of Reference during the year are appropriately covered. 
The  Committee  considers  that  it  has  discharged  its  responsibilities  as  set  out  in  its  terms  of  reference  to  the  extent 
appropriate during the year. 

Financial reporting 

The Audit Committee reviewed the appropriateness of the Group’s interim and full year financial statements, including 
evaluating  the  significant  financial  reporting  judgments  made  by  management  to  ensure  that  they  were  appropriate, 
considering the reports from management and ensuring that the external auditors concurred with management and the 
committee’s conclusions.  

The main areas of focus considered by the Committee during 2021/22 were as follows:  

41 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

The presentation of the financial statements, including the presentation of adjusted performance measures. 

Following  review  of  reports  from  management  the  Committee  concurred  that  the  presentation  of  the  adjusted 
performance measures is appropriate, balanced and enables the users of the accounts to understand the underlying and 
on-going performance of the business. 

Going concern 

The Committee assessed the appropriateness of the going concern assumption. In doing this the committee reviewed the 
resources  available  to  the  Group,  taking  account  of  the  Group’s trading  and  cash  flow  forecast  together  with  available 
funding headroom in these very uncertain trading times because of the impact of  component shortages, COVID-19 and 
inflation.  The  committee  also  considered  two  scenarios  one  where  the  acquisition  of  Custom  Power  completed  and 
alternatively where it did not complete. Based on this information as disclosed on pages 39, 40, 76 and 77 in the basis of 
preparation the committee concluded that the Going Concern principle was appropriate. In finalising the accounts, the 
committee noted that the external auditors accepted management and the committee’s conclusions. 

Review for the potential impairment of goodwill and other intangible assets.  

The  Committee  reviewed  and  challenged  the  key  assumptions,  judgements,  and  sensitivities  in  the  report  from 
management. The Committee concurred that the expected future cash flows of the  Group support the carrying value of 
goodwill and other intangible assets, and that there were no triggering events which suggested any potential impairment 
of goodwill and other intangible assets. 

Review of Acquisition accounting. 

Following review of reports from management and discussion with the CFO, which set out the updated assessment of the 
fair  value  of  deferred  contingent  consideration,  the  Committee  concurred  with  the  judgements  within  the  acquisition 
accounting, and that the treatment was in accordance with IFRS3.  

The audit committee reviewed the post balance sheet events disclosures associated with the planned acquisition of Custom 
Power which is subject to a general meeting on the 29 July 2022 and concluded the disclosures were appropriate. 

Accounting for R&D tax credits. 

Following review of reports from management and correspondence with the companies’ R&D tax advisors, setting out the 
level of the R&D claim, the level of the R&D tax credit which is deferred and amortised to match to capitalised development 
programmes, the Committee concurred that the R&D tax credit accounting was appropriate. 

Review of judgemental areas, and specifically the level of accounting provisions.  

Following review of reports from management the two areas of more significant judgment are provisions for credit defaults 
based on the expected loss rate in accordance with IFRS 9, and provisions for obsolete inventories. This is an area where 
there was extensive discussion, challenge and review between the auditors, management, and the audit committee.  

The committee recognised that the potential for working capital exposures have historically seen one off significant write 
offs,  however  the  recent  current  year  write  offs  pleasingly  have  been  low.  The  Committee  concurred  in  light  of  the 
significant  increases  in  working  capital  investment  and  the  reduction  in  the  provision  as  a  percentage  of  the  invested 
working capital combined with the fact the provisioning policy had been applied consistently that the level of provisions 
remains appropriate. 

Annual report 

At  the  request  of  the  Board  the  Committee  considered  whether  the  2021/22  annual  report  was  fair,  balanced,  and 
understandable  and  whether  it  provided  the  relevant  information  for  stakeholders  to assess  the  Group’s  performance, 
business model and strategy. 

Having taken account of the other information provided to the Board throughout the year, the Committee was satisfied 
that, taken as a whole, the annual report was fair, balanced, and understandable. 

The Committee was satisfied that based on its review, challenge and debate of the draft financial statements and the key 
accounting items, that the assumptions made, the judgements applied, and the accounting & disclosures were appropriate. 

The Committee reviewed and recommended the approval of the narrative reporting statements on corporate governance, 
internal control and risk management in the annual report and the half year and trading statements. 

42 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

External auditors 

The Audit Committee has developed a formal Auditor Independence Policy. In accordance with this policy, the Committee 
oversees the relationship with the external auditors and monitors all services provided by them and all fees payable to 
them.  This  is  to  ensure  that  potential  conflicts  of  interest  are  considered,  and  that  an  independent,  objective  and 
professional relationship is maintained. 

Following the completion of last year’s audit by RSM UK Audit LLP a comprehensive debrief was completed to ensure that 
the value from the audit was maximised for all stakeholders. The output of the debrief formed part of the audit planning 
and scoping process to ensure continuous improvement. 

The  Audit  Committee  also  monitors  the  effectiveness  of  the  annual  audit.  In  advance  of  the  financial  year  end,  the 
Committee receives a detailed audit plan from the auditors which identifies the auditors’ assessment of the key risks and 
their intended areas of focus. This is agreed with the Committee to ensure that  the scope and coverage of audit work is 
appropriate. 

Based on the scope of work the committee ensure that the proposed fees are fair and reasonable and represent value for 
the services provided. 

As in prior years the provision of external audit and tax compliance are separated where practical. As such tax advice is 
provided by Bevan Buckland LLP and The Kings Mill Practice.  

In  addition,  Solid  State  PLC’s  management  also  provide  the  Committee  with  feedback  on  their  view  of  the  quality  and 
effectiveness of the audit. This feedback is considered in conjunction with the Committee’s own review of the auditor’s 
performance in delivering an effective, objective, independent and a high-quality audit. 

Based on the prior year audit and the review completed of this year’s services delivered in respect of the 2021/22 audit of 
Solid  State  PLC,  both  management  and  the  audit  committee  were  satisfied  that  there  had  been  appropriate  focus and 
challenge on the primary areas of audit risk and they assessed the quality of the audit process as good. 

Non-audit services 

The Committee also regularly reviews the nature, extent, objectivity, and cost of non-audit services provided by the external 
auditors.  

Under this policy, the award to the Group’s auditors of audit related services, tax consulting services or other non-audit 
related services in excess of £10,000 must first be approved by the Audit Committee. The policy also sets out guidelines for 
the recruitment of employees or former employees of the external auditor.  

In addition, the Group’s auditors are required to make a formal report to the Audit Committee annually on the safeguards 
that are in place to maintain their independence and the internal safeguards in place to ensure their objectivity. In the 
current year it was flagged that taxation services have been provided by RSM to a non-significant subsidiary of the Group 
in the United States due to a legacy relationship prior to acquisition. The fees are not considered significant in the context 
of the Group fee. 

43 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Non-audit services 

The nature of the services provided by the auditors and the amounts paid to them are as detailed below: 

RSM UK audit LLP (Group auditors) 

Fees payable to company’s auditors for the audit of the parent company 
accounts and consolidated financial statements 
Fees payable to company’s auditor and its associates for other services: 

•  Other assurance services 
• 

Taxation services * 

• 

Services relating to corporate finance transactions 

•  Other non-audit services 

Total fees payable to the Group auditors 

31 March 22 
£’000 

31 March 21 
£’000 

120 

123 

- 

6 

- 

- 

- 

- 
48 
3 

_______ 

_______ 

126 

174 

_______ 

_______ 

* Legacy service for acquired entity and RSM LLP (USA) have resigned as tax advisors. 

The audit scope for the year ended 31 March 2022 relates to the audit of the Consolidated Group Accounts and that of the 
parent company. In addition to the Dormant non trading companies several of the UK trading subsidiaries have adopted 
the exemption from the requirements to file audited financial statements by virtue of section 479A of the Companies Act 
2006. In adopting the exemption Solid State PLC has provided a statutory guarantee to these subsidiaries in accordance 
with section 479C of the Companies Act 2006 (see note 14). 

Internal Audit 

The Board asks the Audit Committee to review annually the requirement for an internal audit function, having regard to 
the size of the Group, the costs of such a function versus the likely benefit and the sufficiency of the assurance to validate 
the functioning of the system of internal control, given the operational and financial circumstances facing the Group. 

Based on the review of the management reporting and external audit assurances over controls and financial reporting, the 
Audit committee considers there was no requirement for an internal audit function at this time. 

As part  of the Group  Chief Financial Officer’s review processes the divisional Managing Directors and the site Financial 
Controllers are obliged to positively confirm that the agreed procedures are in place and are being adhered to, with specific 
reference to key controls such as bank and control account reconciliations. 

It  has  been  reviewed  by  the  Committee  and  they  remain  satisfied  with  the  arrangements.  No  significant  failings  or 
weaknesses were identified by the internal management review and sign off process, but several minor improvements were 
identified and implemented. The capacity within financial resources was reviewed post the two acquisitions last year and 
expanded as required. 

The Committee also considers the discharge of the Board’s responsibilities in the areas of corporate governance, financial 
reporting, and internal control, including the internal management of risk, as identified in the FRC’s revised guidance on 
Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting. 

Risk management activities are dealt with in more detail in the Strategic Report on pages 12 to 16. 

44 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Internal control 

The Audit Committee reviews the effectiveness of the Group’s system of internal controls and risk management activities 
bi-annually as part of the half year end and full year public reporting. 

The  key  procedures  that  the  Directors  have  established  with  a  view  to  providing  effective  internal  control  include  the 
following: 

a clearly defined organisational structure and delegated limits of authority; 

• 
•  Group policies and procedures in respect of financial reporting and control, contract approval, project appraisal, 
human  resources,  quality  control,  health  and  safety,  information  security  and  corporate  governance  and 
compliance; 
the preparation of annual budgets and regular forecasts which are approved by the Board; 
the monitoring of performance against budget and forecasts and the reporting of any variances in a timely manner 
to the Board; 
regular review and self-assessment of the risks to which the Group is exposed, taking steps to monitor and mitigate 
these wherever possible; 

• 
• 

• 

•  where appropriate, taking out insurance cover; and, 
• 

approval by the Audit Committee of audit plans and, on behalf of the Board, receipt of reports on the Group’s 
accounting  and  financial  reporting  practices  and  its  internal  controls  together  with  reports  from  the  external 
auditors as part of their normal audit work. 

P Haining FCA  
Audit Committee Chairman 
27 July 2022 

45 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT 

On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present our Directors’ Remuneration Report (the “Report”) for the year ended 31 
March 2022.  

The Remuneration Committee is committed to structuring the remuneration packages of Executive Directors and senior 
management that are competitive and enable the Group to attract, retain and motivate talented people that can develop 
and execute the Group’s strategy. To promote the long-term success of the Company, the Executive Directors incentive 
benefits are performance based and earned only subject to the satisfaction of performance conditions. These performance 
conditions are aligned with the interests of the shareholders. 

In determining the remuneration packages for the Executive Directors for the forthcoming financial year, the Committee 
took into account the following factors: 

• 

• 
• 
• 

The Group’s overall performance and strategy  - in particular, the Committee noted the strong organic growth in 
profitability, value enhancing acquisitions, and record trading of Solid-State PLC for the year ended 31 March 2022; 
Current and emerging market practice; 
Best practice expectations of institutional investors; and 
The competitiveness of the Company’s remuneration – the Committee looked both at other companies in the AIM 
and Small Cap index as well as a set of comparators that have similar complexities to Solid State PLC. 

All decisions made by the Committee have been made under the Group Remuneration Policy. 

Basic salary increases for the forthcoming year have been determined by reference to a peer Group of UK listed technology 
companies, an understanding of the general rate of salary inflation and a desire to ensure a competitive level of pay. 

Accordingly, increases have been determined as follows: 

• 
• 
• 

Group Chief Executive  
Group Chief Financial Officer  
Divisional Managing Directors  

–   7.5% 
–   6.1% 
–   6.1% 

In addition to basic pay, the Committee determined that an annual bonus pool should be set aside based upon a reasonable 
share of the excess of any profits earned over the market expectation at the beginning of each year. This will be set such 
that: 

• 
• 
• 

No bonus accrues until the company meets or exceeds expectation (after bonus cost); 
The cost of the scheme would not normally exceed one third of the excess profits; and, 
Aggregate allocations from the pool (set  at the discretion of the Committee at the  end of each year)  would not 
normally exceed 60% of aggregate basic salaries. 

46 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Business performance and resulting remuneration outcomes for the year ending 31 March 2022 

It has been another record year for the Company and for Shareholders as discussed in the Strategic Report. Solid State PLC 
has continued to deliver strong results for Shareholders. Trading for the year ended 31 March 2022 was strong across both 
divisions and the Group has delivered full-year adjusted earnings which are 19% ahead of the market expectations from 
July 2021. 

Considering  this  performance,  the  Committee  decided  to  allocate  a  discretionary  annual  bonus  pool  for  the  Executive 
Directors which  in total was equivalent to  60% of the Executive Group’s total basic salary. This reflects the view of the 
Committee that the current year performance has been exceptionally strong in challenging times. Further details of bonus 
and LTIP awards can be found on pages 50 and 51 of this report.  

Share Option incentives 

The Committee also recognise the benefits of implementing a long-term reward for the executive through an LTIP. This is 
intended to encourage retention and motivation of executive Directors and other key members of the management team 
through building an equity investment in the company aligned to the generation of long-term shareholder value. 

During the previous financial year new share option plans; a HMRC approved Company Share Option Plan (“CSOP”) and an 
unapproved Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) offering opportunities to build meaningful equity stakes in the Company for 
approximately 12 – 15 key employees, including the executive Directors, were implemented. The first award made to the 
senior leadership team followed the ratification at the AGM. These plans operate in a manner consistent with relevant 
Investment Association’s guidelines, including, for example, a limit to dilution as a consequence of aggregate awards of 
10% over a ten-year period. Awards under these plans are typically expected to be made annually following the AGM and 
another award is planned for later this year.  

Other key activities in the year ending 31 March 2022 

During the year under review, the Committee held two formal meetings. As well as the implementation of the remuneration 
policy, the Committee also carried out the following activities: 

•  Reviewed and approved the Executive Directors’ performance against financial and non-financial objectives for 

the year ended 31 March 2022 and determined the bonuses payable; 

•  Determined salary increases for Executive Directors for the year ending 31 March 2023; 
•  Approved the LTIP Awards to be made in the year ending 31 March 2023 and their performance conditions; 
•  Reviewed and approved the annual bonus structure for Executive Directors for the year ending 31 March 2022; 
•  Awarded the second grant of 36,750 shares under the HMRC approved CSOP plan to senior staff; 
•  Awarded the second grant of 42,800 shares under the new LTIP plan to the executives. 

Further  detail  on  the  above can  be  found  in  the  Annual Report  on  Remuneration.  During  2022/23,  the  Committee  will 
continue to review the reward arrangements appropriate to Executive Directors. 

The Annual Report on Remuneration explains how our policy has been implemented during the year and, along with this 
letter, will be subject to an advisory vote at our AGM (resolution 2). We hope that you will support this resolution. 

P Magowan 
Remuneration Committee Chairman 
27 July 2022 

47 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Single page remuneration summary 

Corporate performance for the year 

Executive Director Total Remuneration 

48 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
      
            
 
 
       
            
 
 
    
            
 
 
   
            
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Remuneration report 

This  report  is  prepared  to  address  the  reporting  requirements  of  the  QCA  code  which  the  company  has  adopted  in 
accordance with AIM rule 26. 

Remuneration Committee 

The  Company’s  remuneration  policy  is  the  responsibility  of  the  Remuneration  Committee  (the  ‘Rem  Co’),  which  was 
established in 2017. The terms of reference of the Rem Co are outlined on the Group website:www.solidstateplc.com.  

The members of the Committee are: Mr P Magowan (Chairman); Mr N Rogers and, Mr P Haining. 

The Rem Co, which is required to meet at least twice a year, met 2 times during the year ended 31 March 2022. The Chief 
Executive  Officer  and  certain  executives  may  be  invited  to  attend  meetings  of  the  Committee  to  assist  it  with  its 
deliberations, but no executive is present when his or her own remuneration is discussed. 

Refreshed remuneration policy 

In reviewing the remuneration policy, the committee has refreshed the policy as set out below.  

Opportunity 

Performance metrics 

Any percentage 
increases will 
ordinarily be in line 
with those across the 
wider workforce. 

However, salary 
increases may be 
higher in exceptional 
circumstances, such 
as the need to retain 
a critical executive, or 
an increase in the 
scope of the 
executive’s role 
(including promotion 
to a more senior role) 
and/or in the size of 
the Group. 

Insurance cover 
based on market 
rates. 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

Up to 4% of base 
salary in addition to 
an employee 
contribution of 5%. 

Remuneration  element  and 
link to strategy 

Operation  

Base Salary – To attract and 
retain quality executives 
which provides a competitive 
total package 

Salaries are reviewed annually 
and normally fixed for 12 
months, effective from 1 April. 

The Committee considers: 

Benefits 

To help retain employees and 
remain competitive in the 
marketplace. 

Pension 

To facilitate long-term 
savings provisions. 

•  Role, competence and 

performance; 

•  Average change in broader 

workforce pay; and,  
•  Group salary budgets. 
Salaries will be benchmarked 
against companies of a 
comparable size and complexity 
which operate, in similar sectors. 

Directors, along with other senior 
UK executives, receive an electric 
or hybrid company car or car 
allowance, life assurance, and 
family medical insurance. (note 
BIK are expected to drop as 
executives transition to electric 
or hybrid vehicles which attract 
lower BIK.)  

The Company operates a defined 
contribution pension scheme. 
Contributions are benchmarked 
periodically against companies of 
a comparable size and complexity 
which operate in similar sectors. 

Executive Directors may take a 
cash allowance in lieu of pension 
contributions. 

49 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Remuneration  element  and 
link to strategy 

Operation  

Opportunity 

Performance metrics 

Annual bonus 

The principal long-term 
measure of Shareholder 
interests is Total Shareholder 
Return. 

The Committee considers 
that this will be enhanced 
through the setting and 
attainment of various short-
term targets, which are 
within the control of the 
Executive Directors.  

These are incentivised 
through the bonus plan 
which rewards the 
achievement of annual 
financial and strategic 
business targets. 

Up to 100% of salary 
payable for 
significant over-
achievement of 
financial and non-
financial bonus 
objectives. 

The bonus will pay 
0% at minimum 
threshold, and 60% 
at excepted 
maximum.  In 
exceptional 
circumstances, the 
Committee has 
discretion to declare 
additional bonus up 
to a maximum of 
100%. 

Targets (financial and non-
financial) are determined and 
reviewed by the Committee 
annually and are selected to be 
relevant for the year in question. 

Actual bonus payable is 
determined by the Committee 
after the financial year-end, based 
on performance against these 
targets. 

Financial objectives are updated to 
reflect acquisitions, disposals and 
currency movements during the 
year. 

Bonus payments are delivered in 
cash or shares. Clawback (of any 
bonus paid) may be applied during 
employment or for 1 year post-
termination in the event of gross 
misconduct, material financial 
misstatement, error in calculation 
of outcomes or in any other 
circumstance that the 
Remuneration Committee 
considers appropriate. 

Performance is assessed on an 
annual basis against financial and 
personal / strategic objectives set at 
the start of each year.  

Financial measures will be weighted 
appropriately each year according to 
business priorities, and will represent 
no less than 70% of the annual 
bonus.   

Performance vs. targeted levels will 
be measured at budgeted FX rates.  

Financial measures may include (but 
are not limited to) PBT and Adj. FD 
EPS. Non-financial measures may 
include strategic measures directly 
linked to the Company’s priorities. 

Personal/strategic objectives will 
represent no more than 30% of the 
bonus and will be set annually to 
capture expected individual 
contributions to Solid State PLCs 
strategic plan.   

The personal element shall not pay 
out unless financial performance is at 
least at Threshold.  

The Remuneration Committee has 
discretion to adjust formulaic bonus 
outcomes to ensure fairness for 
shareholders and participants, to 
ensure pay aligns underlying 
company performance, and to avoid 
unintended outcomes.   

These adjustments can be either 
upwards (within plan limits) or 
downwards (including down to zero).  

The Remuneration Committee may 
consider measures outside of the 
bonus framework to ensure there is 
no reward for failure. 

50 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Remuneration 
element and link to 
strategy 

Company Share 
Option Plan (“CSOP”) 

To motivate senior 
staff and executives 
to deliver shareholder 
value over the longer 
term. 

Long Term Incentive 
Plan (“LTIP”) 

To motivate 
executives to deliver 
shareholder value 
over the longer term. 

Operation  

Opportunity 

Performance metrics 

Awards of up to the 
applicable HMRC 
approved limits 

Performance metrics reflect strategic goals 
and milestones. 

The exercise of the award is dependent 
upon the individual’s continued 
employment for a three-year period from 
the date of grant, subject to the good and 
bad leaver provisions within the Plan rules 
and the satisfaction by the Company of 
certain performance conditions over the 
three-year vesting period. 

The performance conditions are based on 
Group financial performance, which may 
include (but not be limited to) Group 
earnings or returns over the performance 
period. 

The Company’s share schemes are funded 
through a combination of shares purchased 
in the market and newly issued shares, as 
appropriate. 

Up to 125% of 
salary. 

Performance metrics reflect strategic goals 
and milestones. 

The exercise of the award is dependent 
upon the individual’s continued 
employment for a three-year period from 
the date of grant, subject to the good and 
bad leaver provisions within the Plan rules 
and the satisfaction by the Company of 
certain performance conditions over the 
three-year vesting period. 

The performance conditions are based on 
Group financial performance, which may 
include (but not be limited to) Group 
earnings or returns over the performance 
period. 

The Company’s share schemes are funded 
through a combination of shares purchased 
in the market and newly issued shares, as 
appropriate. 

Awards of conditional shares 
through market price options are 
typically granted annually, with 
vesting dependent on the 
achievement of performance 
conditions over the following three 
years. 

Dividend equivalents will be paid 
on vested awards. 

These awards will be made under 
an HMRC approved company share 
option plan (CSOP) to Senior staff 
and Executive Directors, 

Malus and clawback applies to 
vested and unvested CSOP awards 
in the event of material 
misstatement of information or 
misconduct. 

The Company monitors the 
number of shares issued under the 
schemes and their impact on 
dilution limits. 

The Company is committed to 
remaining within the Investment 
Association’s 10% dilution limit. 

Awards of conditional shares 
through nil-cost options are 
typically granted annually, with 
vesting dependent on the 
achievement of performance 
conditions over the following three 
years. 

Vested awards are subject to a 
two-year holding period, in 
aggregate a five-year period from 
award to exercise. 

Dividend equivalents will be paid 
on vested awards. 

These awards will be made under 
an unapproved share option plan 
(USOP) to Executive Directors, 

Malus and clawback applies to 
vested and unvested LTIP awards in 
the event of material misstatement 
of information or misconduct. 

The Company monitors the 
number of shares issued under the 
schemes and their impact on 
dilution limits. 

The Company is committed to 
remaining within the Investment 
Association’s 10% dilution limit. 

51 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Details of the policy on fees paid to the Company’s Non-Executive Directors are set out in the table below: 

Remuneration  element  and  link  to 
strategy 

Operation  

Opportunity 

Fees to attract and retain Non-
Executive Directors of the highest 
calibre with broad commercial and 
other experience relevant to the 
Company. 

The fees paid to the Non 
Executive Directors are 
determined by the Board 
(excluding the Non-Executive 
Directors or group of Non 
Executive Directors whose 
remuneration is being discussed).  

Fee levels are benchmarked 
against similar roles at 
comparable companies.  Time 
commitment and responsibility 
are considered when reviewing 
fee levels. 

Fee levels are reviewed annually, with 
any adjustments effective 1 April in the 
year following review. It is expected 
that increases to Non-Executive 
Director fee levels will normally be in 
line with salaried employees over the 
life of this policy.  However, in the 
event that there is a material 
misalignment with market, or a 
material change in the time 
commitment required to fulfil a Non-
Executive Director role, the Board has 
the power to make an appropriate 
adjustment to the fee level. 

Performance 
metrics 

N/A 

Notes to the remuneration policy and performance conditions and target setting 

Each year, the Committee will determine the weightings, performance metrics and targets as well as timing of grants and 
payments for the annual bonus, CSOP and LTIP plans within the approved remuneration policy and relevant plan rules.  

The Committee evaluates a number of factors which assist in reaching their conclusions and view. These include, but are 
not limited to, the strategic priorities for the Company over the mid/long term, Shareholder feedback, the risk profile of 
the business and the macroeconomic climate. 

The  Annual  Bonus  Scheme  is  measured  against  a  balance  of  profitability,  and  the  delivery  of  key  strategic  areas  of 
importance for the business. The profitability metrics used include adjusted profit before tax and /or adjusted fully diluted 
EPS. 

The  CSOP  and  LTIP  are  assessed  against  a  performance  measure  identified  as  the  most  relevant  to  driving  sustainable 
bottom line business performance, as well as providing value for Shareholders. This measure is currently considered to be 
real growth in adjusted fully diluted EPS. 

Targets are set against the annual and long-term plans, taking into account analysts’ forecasts, the Company’s strategic 
plans, prior year performance, estimated vesting levels and the affordability of pay arrangements. Targets are set to provide 
an appropriate balance of risk and reward to ensure that, while being motivational for participants, maximum payments 
are only made for exceptional performance. 

In exceptional circumstances, the Committee has the discretion to adjust  and/or set  different  targets and performance 
conditions for annual bonus and long-term incentive plans, provided the new conditions are no tougher or easier than the 
original conditions. This includes events where conditions are unable to fulfil their original intended purpose. Awards may 
also be adjusted in certain circumstances (e.g. for a rights issue, a corporate restructuring or for special dividends). 

Any  discretion  exercised  by  the  Committee  in  the  adjustment  of  performance  conditions  will  be  fully  explained  to 
Shareholders  in  the  relevant  report.  If  the  discretion  is  material  and  upwards,  the  Committee  will  consult  with  major 
Shareholders in advance. No such discretion was exercised during FY21/22. 

The Committee can also grant additional LTIP awards to participants in return for their bearing the Company’s liability to 
employer’s National Insurance arising on the exercise of such grants made to them above. The additional award ensures 
that the participants are in a neutral position on an after-tax basis, assuming no change in tax rates. 

All historical awards that have been granted before the date this policy came into effect and remain outstanding (including 
those detailed on page 58 of this report) remain eligible to vest based on their original award terms. 

52 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Recruitment (and appointment) policy 

The  remuneration  package  for  a  new  Executive  Director  would  be  set  in  accordance  with  the  terms  of  the  Company’s 
approved remuneration policy in force at the time of appointment. The same approach would be adopted where a Director 
is promoted to the Board from within the Group. 

Element 

Base salary 

Pension  

Benefits 

Annual Bonus 

Recruitment Policy 

The base salaries of new appointees will be determined by reference to relevant market data, experience 
and skills of the individual, internal relativities, and current basic salary.  Where new appointees have 
initial basic salaries set below market, any shortfall may be managed with phased increases over multiple 
years subject to the individual’s development in the role. 

New appointees will receive pension contributions or an equivalent cash supplement in line with existing 
policy. 

New  appointees  will  be  eligible  to  receive  benefits  which  may  include  (but  are  not  limited  to)  those 
outlined in the policy table.   

The structure  described in the policy table will apply to new appointees with the relevant maximum 
being pro-rated to reflect the proportion of employment over the year. Targets for the personal element 
will be tailored to each executive. 

LTIP 

New  appointees  will  be  granted  awards  under  the  LTIP  on  the  same  terms  as  other  executives,  as 
described in the policy table. 

In addition, a new recruit may be awarded up to 125% of salary in performance shares, which would be 
subject to the same performance measures and rules in force for the LTIPs at the time of appointment. 

Compensation for 
forfeited remuneration 

The approach in respect of compensation for forfeited remuneration in respect of a previous employer 
will be considered on a case-by-case basis taking into account all relevant factors, such as performance 
achieved or likely to be achieved, the proportion of the performance period remaining and the form of 
the award. 

The Committee retains the ability to make use of the relevant guidance to facilitate the “buyout”. Any 
“buy-out” awards would have a fair value no higher than the remuneration forfeited. 

Notice period and payment for loss of office 

It is the Company’s policy that Executive Directors should have service contracts incorporating a notice period of one year. 
However, it may be necessary occasionally to offer shorter or longer initial notice periods to new Directors. 

Under  the  terms  of  their  service  contracts,  any  termination  payments  are  not  pre-determined  but  are  determined  in 
accordance with the Director’s contractual rights, taking account of the circumstances and the Director’s duty to mitigate 
loss. The Company’s objective is to manage its exposure to the risk of a potential termination payment. 

Non-Executive Directors have letters of appointment for a term of one year whereupon they are normally renewed, but 
generally for no more than nine years in aggregate. Non-Executive Directors are not eligible for payment on termination, 
other than payment to the end of their contracts. 

53 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Service contracts and letters of appointment 

The Executive Directors have entered into service agreements which can be terminated by either party by providing the 
required notice period set out in their respective service contracts. 

The Chairman and Non-Executive Directors have entered into letters of appointment for an initial fixed period up to the 
first AGM where in accordance the company’s policy on re-election they are re-elected annually by the shareholders at the 
AGM. The appointment can be terminated on six months’ notice by either party. 

N Rogers 
G S Marsh 
P O James  
M T Richards 
J L Macmichael  
P Haining 
P Magowan 

Non-Executive Chairman 
Group Chief Executive 
Group Chief Financial Officer 
Systems MD 
Components MD 
Non-Executive Director  
Non-Executive Director 

External appointments 

Date of contract / letter 
of appointment 
19/06/2019 
19/06/1996 
18/11/2016 
06/04/2016 
26/05/2010 
31/10/2017 
17/11/2020 

Contractual notice period  

6 months by either party 
12 months by either party 
12 months by either party 
12 months by either party 
12 months by either party 
6 months by either party 
6 months by either party 

With the approval of the Board in each case, and subject to the overriding requirements of the Group, Executive Directors 
may accept external appointments as Non-Executive Directors of other companies and retain any fees received.   

During the year ended 31 March 2022, the Executive Directors did not hold any Non-Executive Directorships with other 
companies other than Mr P O James who on a voluntary basis is a Non-Executive Director for the British Waterski Federation 
Limited and is a Director of Bradley Drive Management Company Ltd. 

LTIP and Bonus leaver provisions 

Reason for leaving 
Annual bonus 
Resignation  
Good leaver / Change of control 

LTIP 
Resignation  

Good leaver / Change of control 

Calculation of vesting / payment 

No annual bonus payable 
Cash bonuses will typically be paid to the extent that performance objectives have been 
met.  Any resulting bonus will typically be prorated for time worked.  The Remuneration 
Committee retains discretion to vary this treatment in individual circumstances. 

Outstanding awards would normally lapse however the committee has the discretion to 
approve vesting based on a pro-rata time apportionment and assessment of achievement 
of performance conditions. 
The Committee determines whether and to what extent outstanding awards vest based 
on the extent to which performance conditions have been achieved. The Remuneration 
Committee retains discretion to vary this treatment in individual circumstances.  

The determination of vesting will be made as soon as reasonably practical following the 
end of the performance period or such earlier date as the Remuneration Committee may 
agree (within 12 months in the event of death). 

In the event of change of control, the following 3 years’ awards will vest on a pro-rata 
time  apportionment  and  assessment  of  achievement  of  performance  conditions  as  a 
minimum.  Any award above this level will be at the committee’s discretion. For the initial 
awards under the LTIP there are transitional provisions applicable. 

In  the  event  of  a  change  of  control,  awards  may  alternatively  be  exchanged  for  new 
equivalent awards in the acquirer by mutual agreement where appropriate. 

A Good leaver is defined as a participant ceasing to be employed by the Group by reason of death,  disability, ill health, 
retirement, or any other reason that the Committee determines in its absolute discretion. 

54 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the Group 

The  remuneration  policy,  which  has  been  implemented  for  the  current  Executive  Directors,  is  more  weighted  towards 
performance-related pay than for other employees. The reason for this is to establish a clear link between remuneration 
received by the Executive Directors and the creation of Shareholder value. 

As mentioned on page 46 of this Annual Report and Accounts, when setting the policy, the Committee takes account of pay 
and employment conditions elsewhere in the Group but has not used any remuneration comparison measures between 
the Executive Directors and other employees. 

Consideration of Shareholder views 

The Committee’s policy is to receive updates on the views of Shareholders and their representative bodies on best practice 
and take these into account. It seeks the views of key Shareholders on matters of remuneration in which it believes they 
would be interested. 

Adoption of the refined policy for 2022/23 

In  addition  to  reviewing  and  refining  the  policy  to  adopt  last  year  to  move  towards  best  practice,  the  committee  has 
reviewed the Executive remuneration for the coming year. The results of this review have been set out in this report. 

(i) Executive remuneration 

During the period, the Committee decided it was appropriate to commence an external review of Executive salaries and 
performance  bonuses.  To  aid  this  the  Committee  have  engaged  with  an  external  employment  benefits  consultant  to 
independently review remuneration against appropriate benchmarking. 

The impact of the review of salaries and bonuses was as follows: 

1 April 2020 to 
31 March 2021 

1 April 2021 to 
31 March 2022 

From 1 April 
2022 

1 April 2020 to 
31 March 2021 

1 April 2021 to 
31 March 2022 

G S Marsh 
P O James 
J L Macmichael 
M T Richards  

 Bonus (£’000) 
111 
87 
96 
96 
______ 
Directors’ remuneration for the year ended 31 March 2022 is set out on page 57 of this document. 

Salary pa (£’000) 
200 
165 
165 
165 
______ 

Salary pa (£’000) 
185 
145 
160 
160 
______ 

Salary pa (£’000) 
215 
175 
175 
175 

 Bonus (£’000) 
105 
105 
105 
105 
______ 

(ii) Chairman and Non-Executive Director remuneration 
The Chairman and the Non-Executive Directors received fee sets out in the table below. The fixed fee covers preparation 
for and attendance at meetings of the full Board and committees thereof.  Should there be any services provided in relation 
to “special projects” that may arise there may be an appropriate incremental fee agreed for these services. 

The Executive Directors are responsible for setting the level of Non-Executive remuneration. The Non-Executive Directors 
are also reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred in attending meetings. 

The Non-Executive Directors are not eligible to participate in the Company’s performance related bonus plan or long term 
incentive plans. Full terms and conditions for each of the Non-Executive Directors are available at the Company’s registered 
office and will be available upon request at the AGM for 15 minutes prior to the meeting and during the meeting. 

N Rogers* 
P Haining  
P J Magowan** 

1 April 2020 to 
31 March 2021 
Total Fees pa 
(£’000) 
42 
25 
7 
______ 

1 April 2021 to 
31 March 2022 
Total Fees pa 
(£’000) 
62 
25 
30 
______ 

From 1 April 
2022 
Total Fees pa 
(£’000) 
66 
26 
32 

*Mr N Rogers was appointed on 17 November 2020 as Chairman and his annual fee of £62,000 was charged pro-rata in 20/21, prior to his appointment 
as Chairman Nigel’s annual Non-Executive fees were £30,000. 
**Mr P Magowan was appointed on 1 January 2021 as such his annual fee of £30,000 was charged pro-rata in 20/21. 

55 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

(iii) Equity-based incentive schemes for 2022 
The Committee strongly believes that equity-based incentive schemes increase the focus of employees in improving Group 
performance, whilst at the same time providing a strong incentive for retaining and attracting individuals of a high calibre. 

Enterprise Management incentive scheme (“EMI”) 
The Solid State plc EMI) comprising conditional (performance-related) share awards (technically structured as nominal cost 
options pursuant to which participants must pay 0.1p per share on the exercise of their awards). 

The last grant was made in June 2017. There were 48,000 EMI options awarded to each Director in June 2017. These options 
vest in three equal tranches based on performance conditions in respect of each year ending 31 March 2018, 31 March 
2019, and 31 March 2020. 

The 2017 EMI awards are subject to two performance conditions. Firstly, the executive must remain in post at the vesting 
date,  secondly  the  options  fully  vest  based  on  exceeding  the  Board  approved  budget  by  25%.  Vesting  commences  for 
performance in excess of the Board approved budget with the options vesting pro-rata on a straight-line basis up to 25% 
above the Board approved budget where the awards fully vest. The market value at the date of grant was £4.23. 

Awards that do not vest as a result of not meeting the performance criteria in any particular year lapse. 

Company Share Option Plan (“CSOP”) 

For 2022, normal CSOP awards of up to the HMRC tax approved levels of £30,000 may be made to senior staff and Executive 
Directors, as outlined in the Policy  Table. For  all participants, awards will vest  after three years in accordance  with the 
performance  conditions  applicable  to  each  grant.  The  performance  conditions  will  be  determined  and  set  by  the 
Remuneration Committee in accordance with the remuneration policy. No award will vest below Threshold performance, 
and vesting will increase on a straight-line basis between Threshold, Target and Stretch. 

Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) 

For 2022, normal LTIP awards of up to 125% of salary may be made to Executive Directors, as outlined in the Policy Table. 
For all participants, awards will vest after three years in accordance with the performance conditions applicable to each 
grant. The performance conditions will be determined and set by the  Remuneration Committee in accordance with the 
remuneration policy.  No award will vest below Threshold performance, and vesting will increase on a straight-line basis 
between Threshold, Target and Stretch.   

For the year ahead the Remuneration Committee intends to make a share option award in the range of  45% to 75% of 
salary  which  will  be  granted  subsequent  to  the  AGM  when  the  shareholders  will  participate  in  an  advisory vote  at  the 
forthcoming AGM (resolution 2).  

The Remuneration Committee intend to make annual awards in accordance with the Policy principles following the AGM 
where they have had the results of the shareholders advisory vote. 

56 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Remuneration for 31 March 2022 (audited)  

The value of all elements of remuneration received by each Director in the year was as follows: 

31 March 2022 

G S Marsh 
P O James 
J L Macmichael 
M T Richards  
N Rogers 
P Haining  
P J Magowan 

Total 

Salary/ 
Fees 
£’000 
200 
165 
165 
165 
62 
12 
30 
______ 
799 
______ 

Consultant 
fees 
£’000 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
13 
- 
______ 
13 
______ 

EMI share 
bonus* 
£’000 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
- 
______ 

Cash Bonus 
** 
£’000 
105 
105 
105 
105 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
420 
______ 

Benefits 
in kind 
£’000 
6 
23 
25 
4 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
58 
______ 

Pension 
Cont’n 
£’000 
4 
7 
1 
7 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
19 
______ 

Single 
figure Total 
£’000 
315 
300 
296 
281 
62 
25 
30 
______ 
1,309 
______ 

* There were no LTIP or EMI shares granted which were due to vest in the period. 

** All Bonuses including the Director bonuses have been accrued, however payment was deferred until the end of Q1 when the results had been finalised 
though not yet formally signed off. 

31 March 2021 

G S Marsh 
P O James 
J L Macmichael 
M T Richards  
N Rogers* 
P Haining 
P J Magowan** 

Consultant 
Fees 
£’000 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
13 
- 
______ 
13 
______ 
*Mr N Rogers was appointed on 17 November 2020 as Chairman and his annual fee of £62,000 has been charged pro-rata. 

Cash Bonus 
**** 
£’000 
111 
87 
96 
96 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
390 
______ 

EMI share 
bonus*** 
£’000 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
- 
______ 

Benefits 
in kind 
£’000 
31 
23 
34 
3 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
91 
______ 

Salary/ 
Fees 
£’000 
185 
145 
160 
160 
42 
12 
7 
______ 
711 
______ 

Pension 
Cont’n 
£’000 
3 
5 
3 
6 
- 
1 
- 
______ 
18 
______ 

Total 

Single 
figure total 
£’000 
330 
260 
293 
265 
42 
26 
7 
______ 
1,223 
______ 

**Mr P Magowan was appointed on 1 January 2021 as such his annual fee of £30,000 has been charged pro-rata. 

*** There were no LTIP or EMI shares granted which were due to vest in the period. 

**** All Bonuses including the Director bonuses have been accrued however payment was deferred until the end of Q1 when the audited results had 
been signed off. 

The principal benefits in kind relate to the provision of company cars, fuel, and private healthcare. 

Of the current year share-based payments charge £144k (2021: £77k) relates to the Directors. 

In addition to the above consultancy fees, additional fees totalling  £31k (2021: £25k) arose during the year in respect of 
accountancy services and out of pocket expenses provided by The Kings Mill Practice, a firm of which Mr P Haining is the 
proprietor.  A balance of £9k (2021: £9k) was due to The Kings Mill Practice at 31 March 2022. 

57 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

The Directors’ interest in the issued ordinary share capital of the Company at today’s date, at 31 March 2022 and 31 March 
2021 or date of appointment if later, were as follows: 

27 July 22 

31 March 22 

31 March 21 

G S Marsh 
M T Richards 
P O James 
J L Macmichael 
N Rogers 
P Haining 
P J Magowan 

280,892 
10,376 
3,205 
122,491 
4,400 
54,627 
4,000 

280,892 
10,376 
3,205 
122,491 
4,400 
54,627 
4,000 

280,906 
10,375 
3,204 
122,430 
4,400 
54,564 
4,000 

Long Term Incentive Plan and Enterprise Management Incentive scheme (‘EMI’) 

Details of the options over the Company’s shares granted under the LTIP and Enterprise Management Incentives Scheme 
are as follows: 

Options 
held at 
31.03.21 
26,700 

42,700 

42,700 

26,700 

Granted 
10,700 

Exercised 
- 

Lapsed 

10,700 

10,700 

10,700 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Options 
held at 
31.03.22 
37,400 

Exercise 
Price 
0.1p – 5p 

Date of 
grant 
29.10.21  April 2018 to April 2031 

Exercise  
period 

53,400 

0.1p – 5p 

29.10.21  April 2018 to April 2031 

53,400 

0.1p – 5p 

29.10.21  April 2018 to April 2031 

37,400 

0.1p – 5p 

29.10.21  April 2018 to April 2031 

G S Marsh 

P O James 

M T Richards 

J L Macmichael 

During the year to 31 March 2022, the Board Granted an award of 10,700 shares to each of the Executive Directors which, 
subject to the performance criteria, will be eligible to vest in 2024. No options were exercised in the year. The market price 
of the shares on 31 March 2022 was £11.75 (2021: £8.30), with a quoted range during the year of £8.30 to £14.05 (2021: 
£3.51 to £9.00). 

Options 
held at 
31.03.20 
16,000 

32,000 

32,000 

32,000 

Granted 
10,700 

Exercised 
- 

Lapsed 

10,700 

10,700 

10,700 

- 

- 

16,000 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Options 
held at 
31.03.21 
26,700 

Exercise 
price 
0.1p – 5p 

Date of 
grant 
28.10.20  April 2018 to April 2030 

Exercise  
period 

42,700 

0.1p – 5p 

28.10.20  April 2018 to April 2030 

42,700 

0.1p – 5p 

28.10.20  April 2018 to April 2030 

26,700 

0.1p – 5p 

28.10.20  April 2018 to April 2030 

G S Marsh 

P O James 

M T Richards 

J L Macmichael 

During the year to 31 March 2021, the Board Granted an award of 10,700 shares to each of the Executive Directors which, 
subject to the performance criteria, will be eligible to vest in 2023.  

Mr J L Macmichael exercised 16,000 share options with an exercise price of 0.01p on the 2 July 2020 and sold an equivalent 
16,000 shares which he already held on the 1 July 2020 at a price of £5.20 resulting in net proceeds and a gain of £83,200. 

P J Magowan 
Remuneration Committee Chairman 
27 July 2022 

58 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT 

The Directors submit their report together with the audited financial statements of the Group in respect of the year ended 
31 March 2022.  

Principal Activities, Review of the Business and Future Developments  

The principal activities of the Group during the year continued to be those of the manufacturing of electronic equipment 
and the value added supplier of electronic components and materials. 

The key performance indicators recognised by management are set out in the KPI section of the strategic report (page 20). 

An overall review of the Group’s trading performance and future developments is given in the Chairman’s Statement and 
Strategic Report. Other than as reported in the corporate and social responsibility section of this report the Group does not 
comment on environmental matters. 

Directors  
The Directors of the Company during the year were:  
N F Rogers 
G S Marsh  
P O James, BSc FCA 
J L Macmichael 
M T Richards  
P Haining, FCA 
P Magowan  

Details  of  the  interests  of  Directors  in  the  shares  of  the  Company  and  Directors’  service  contracts  are  stated  in  the 
Remuneration Committee Report on pages 46 to 58.  

Corporate Governance  

The Board confirms that the Group has had regard, throughout the accounting period, with the provisions set out in the 
Quoted  Companies  Alliance  (QCA)  Code  and  the  UK  Corporate  Governance  Code  which  was  issued  by  the  Financial 
Reporting Council in April 2016.  

Details of how the Group has adopted the QCA Code and corporate governance principles are set  out  in the corporate 
governance report on pages 27 to 40. 

Internal Control  

Details  of  how  the  Board  has  implemented  its  internal  control  framework  and  processes  are  set  out  in  the  corporate 
governance report on pages 27 to 40. 

Board of Directors  

The structure and operation of the Board of Directors is set out in the corporate governance report on pages 27 to 40. 

Principal risks and uncertainties  

Details of the principal risks and uncertainties of the Group are set out in the strategic report on pages 12 to 16. 

Financial Instruments  

Details of the use of financial instruments by the Group are contained in note 21 of the financial statements. 

Purchase of Own Shares  

At the year end the Company had in place authority to purchase up to 15% of the issued ordinary shares under authority 
given by a resolution at the Annual General Meeting on 8 September 2021. This authority expires on 8 March 2023. During 
the year the company repurchased 7,000 shares with a nominal value of £350 at market value of £80k into treasury shares 
which get used for the all-employee share scheme. 

Dividends  

Details of the dividends are disclosed in note 9 and in the Chairman’s Statement on page 5. 

Post balance sheet events 

Details of post balance sheet events are included on pages 3, 4, 15, 76 and 77 and note 32.

59 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT (continued) 

Research and Development 

During the year the Group has continued to invest in research and development in partnership with some of its customers 
to  develop  technical  electronic  solutions  to  address  the  demand  of  our  customers  in  their  core  markets  of  electronic 
communications, mobile battery power and rugged and industrial computing. During the year we  invested in excess of 
£2.0m (2021: £1.5m) in research and development. The Company continues to claim R&D tax credits where eligible.  

Share options award 

On 6 October 2021 and 29 October 2021, the company granted options to the Senior Leadership team and the Executive 
Directors under the  Company’s  CSOP and LTIP respectively, further details are provided in the  remuneration report on 
pages 46 to 58 and note 28. 

Employee engagement and Consultation 

The Group places considerable value on the involvement of its employees and continues to keep them informed on matters 
affecting them as employees and on the various factors impacting the performance of the Group. This is achieved through 
formal  and  informal  meetings,  Divisional  business  reviews  “Town  Hall”  all  hands  briefings  and  Division  and  Group 
newsletter updates. Employees are encouraged to be involved in the Group’s performance by participation in  long term 
incentive plans or share option schemes for the senior team and the all-employee share scheme. The Executive Directors 
regularly engage with and visit the Group’s sites and the Board meetings are also rotated across the various UK locations. 

Further details set out in the compliance with section 172 and within the corporate governance report on pages 27 to 40. 

Disabled persons 

The Group gives fair consideration to applications for employment made by disabled persons, bearing in mind the particular 
aptitudes and abilities of the applicant concerned. In the event of employees becoming disabled, every effort will be made 
to ensure that their employment with the Group continues and that appropriate training and/or reasonable adjustments 
are arranged. It is the policy of the Group that the training, career development and promotion of disabled persons should 
provide consistent opportunities to that of other employees. 

Further details are set out in the corporate governance report on pages 27 to 40. 

Insurance 

The Group has in place appropriate Directors’ and Officers’ indemnity insurance for all Group companies. 

Business relationships  

Further details are set out in the corporate governance report on pages 27 to 40. 

Going Concern  

Further details are set out in the corporate governance report on pages 27 to 40. 

Renewal of authority to purchase the Company’s shares 

Last year, a resolution was passed at the Annual General Meeting to give the Company the authority to purchase its own 
Ordinary shares on the Stock Exchange.  This authority would expire after a period of eighteen months from the passing of 
the resolution. In order to avoid this authority expiring during the next year and the need to call an extraordinary general 
meeting to renew the authority, a resolution to renew the authority is set out in the notice of the Annual General Meeting 
at the end of this document. 

Under the terms of the resolution to be proposed at the Annual General Meeting, the maximum number of shares which 
may be purchased is 15% of the issued Ordinary share capital of the Company.  The minimum price payable by the Company 
for its Ordinary shares will be 5p and the maximum price will be determined by reference to current market prices.  The 
authority will automatically expire after a period of eighteen months from the passing of the resolution unless renewed. 

It is not the Directors’ current intention to exercise the power to purchase the Company’s Ordinary shares, but they believe 
that under certain circumstances it would be in the Company’s best interests to do so. 

Your Directors consider that the resolutions to be proposed at the meeting are in the best interests of the Company and its 
shareholders.  They unanimously recommend that all Ordinary shareholders vote in favour of the resolution at the Annual 
General Meeting as they intend to do in respect of their beneficial holdings. 

60 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT (continued) 

Nigel Rogers  (dob: April 1961), Non-Executive Director (appointed 01 July 2019) 
Nigel qualified as a Chartered Accountant in 1983 with PwC. He became Group Finance Director of Stadium Group plc in 
1996, before progressing to Group Chief Executive Officer in 2001. He joined 600 Group plc as Group Chief Executive Officer 
in 2012 and led the turnaround of the AIM-quoted global machine tool business, increasing strategic focus on the growth 
of  its  laser  marking  business  until  leaving  in  April  2015  to  begin  a  plural  career.  Nigel  is  also  Chairman  of  Transense 
Technologies plc and Chairman of Surgical Innovations Group plc. 

Gary Marsh, (dob: April 1966), Chief Executive Officer 
Gary joined the Company in 1986 having gained an HND in Business and Finance Studies.  He has held various positions 
within the Group including that of Operations Director of Solid State Supplies prior to his appointment as its Managing 
Director in 1997.  In addition to this role, Gary was appointed Group Managing Director in 2002 following the acquisition of 
Steatite. In 2011 following the acquisition of Rugged Systems he was appointed as Group Chief Executive Officer. 

Peter James, (dob: June 1979), Director 
Peter qualified as a Chartered Accountant with PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) in 2003. He was appointed to the Board 
of Solid State PLC in February 2017. Before joining Solid State PLC, Peter was Group Financial Controller at IQE plc where 
he was a key member of the senior leadership team successfully completing two significant transactions, funded through 
an equity fund raising and a global refinancing. Subsequently he led the integration project, aligning the enlarged Group 
with its customer markets serviced by manufacturing sites, delivering efficiency and material savings. At PwC Peter gained 
a wide range of experience in Audit and Financial Due Diligence advising a broad range of companies in a variety of sectors, 
including multinational main market and AIM listed companies. In addition, on a voluntary basis Peter is a Non-Executive 
Director for the British Water Ski and Wakeboard Federation Limited providing independent financial oversight as Chair of 
the Audit and Finance Committee. 

John Macmichael, (dob: April 1961), Director 
John  is  an  electronics  and  communications  graduate  whose  career  has  encompassed  design  and  development  through 
applications  engineering,  sales,  sales  management  and  general  business  management.  John  has  gained  extensive 
management experience of multiple sales channels with distributors and OEMs both here in the UK and worldwide through 
his international sales management role whilst living in the USA. Formerly managing Director of Breckenridge Technologies 
Limited,  John  joined  Solid  State  Supplies  Limited  in  2006  before  being  appointed  managing  Director  in  April  2011.  He 
presently runs the Components Division on behalf of Solid State PLC. 

Matthew Richards, (dob: October 1963), Director 
Matthew was appointed as Managing Director of Steatite Limited in April 2016. Matthew comes to the Board with 30 years 
of experience in the defence electronics industry. He has a track record of success in both private and public companies, 
most  recently  as  Senior  Vice  President  and  Managing  Director  at  API  Technologies  Corp  running  operations  in  the  UK, 
Canada  and  USA,  specialising  in  RF  and  Security  solutions  with  a  focus  on  high  reliability  and  harsh  environment 
applications. Prior to that, Matthew held business development and sales leadership roles with the L3 Corporation. He has 
extensive experience dealing with the Government customers at home and abroad having travelled extensively in Europe, 
the Middle East and Asia. Matthew started his career installing and commissioning terrestrial and satellite antennas systems 
for broadcast and military users before moving into sales in the early 1980s. 

Pete Magowan, (dob August 1967), Senior Independent Non-Executive Director (appointed Jan 2021).  
Pete holds a Bachelor of Science degree in Electrical and Electronic Engineering from the University of Manchester Institute 
of Science and Technology and a Diploma in Marketing from the University of Bristol Business School. Pete started his career 
in marketing with STMicroelectronics before becoming an early employee and main Board member of ARM Holdings plc. 
Pete then went on to become a General Partner at Alta Berkeley Ventures and an Executive at Fidelity International. Pete 
is also a Non Executive director of Filtronics plc. 

Peter Haining FCA, (dob: September 1956), Non-Executive Director and Company Secretary 
Peter Haining qualified as a chartered accountant in 1980 and later worked at Binder Hamlyn. He left Binder Hamlyn in 
1992, together with three colleagues, to establish The Kings Mill Partnership.  

61 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT (continued) 

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities  

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report, Strategic Report, the Directors’ Report and the Group and 
parent  company  financial  statements  in  accordance  with  applicable  law  and  regulations.  Company  law  requires  the 
Directors to prepare Group and parent company financial statements for each financial year.  The Directors have elected 
under  company  law  and  are  required  by  the  AIM  Rules  of  the  London  Stock  Exchange  to  prepare  the  Group  financial 
statements in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards in conformity with the requirements of the 
Companies  Act  2006  and  have  elected  under  company  law  to  prepare  the  parent  company  financial  statements  in 
accordance  with  United  Kingdom  Generally  Accepted  Accounting  Practice  (United  Kingdom  Accounting  Standards  and 
applicable law).  

The group financial statements are required by law and UK adopted international accounting standards in conformity with 
the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 to present fairly the financial position  and performance of the group. The 
Companies Act 2006 provides in relation to such financial statements that references in the relevant part of that Act to 
financial statements giving a true and fair view are references to their achieving a fair presentation.  

Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true 
and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and parent company and of the profit or loss of the Group for that period. 
In preparing each of the Group and parent company financial statements, the Directors are required to: 

select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently; 

• 
•  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent; 
• 

for  the  Group  financial  statements,  state  whether  they  have  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  UK  adopted 
international accounting standards in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006; 
for  the  parent  company  financial  statements,  state  whether  applicable  UK  Accounting  Standards  have  been 
followed, subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in the financial statements; and 

• 

•  prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group 

and the parent company will continue in business. 

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Group’s 
and Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the  financial position of the Group  and 
Company to enable them to ensure that the financial statements comply with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 
They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Group and the Company and hence for taking reasonable steps 
for  the  prevention  and  detection  of  fraud  and  other  irregularities.  In  addition,  the  Directors  are  responsible  the 
maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included in the Solid State plc website. Legislation in 
the  UK  governing  the  preparation  and  dissemination  of  financial  statements  may  differ  from  legislation  in  other 
jurisdictions. 

Auditors  

Each of the persons who are Directors at the time when this Directors’ Report is approved has confirmed that: 

• 

• 

so far as that Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the parent company’s auditors are 
unaware, and 
that Director has taken all steps that ought to have been taken as a Director in order to be aware of any information 
needed  by  the  auditors  in  connection  with  preparing  their  report  and  to  establish  that  the  parent  company’s 
auditors are aware of that information. 

A resolution to re-appoint RSM UK Audit LLP as auditors will be proposed at the next annual general meeting. 

By order of the Board  

P Haining FCA  
Secretary  
27 July 2022 

Registered Office: 2 Ravensbank Business Park, Hedera Road, Redditch, B98 9EY 

62 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC 

Opinion 

We have audited the financial statements of Solid State plc (the ‘parent company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘group’) for the 
year ended 31 March 2022 which comprise the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, Consolidated Statement 
of  Changes  in  Equity,  Consolidated  Statement  of  Financial  Position,  Consolidated  Statement  of  Cash  Flows,  Company 
Statement of Financial Position, Company Statement of Changes in Equity and notes to the financial statements, including 
significant accounting policies. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the group 
financial  statements  is  applicable  law  and  UK-adopted  International  Accounting  Standards.  The  financial  reporting 
framework  that  has  been  applied  in  the  preparation  of  the  parent  company  financial  statements  is  applicable  law  and 
United  Kingdom  Accounting  Standards,  including  Financial  Reporting  Standard  102  “The  Financial  Reporting  Standard 
applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland” (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice). 

In our opinion:  

• 

• 

• 

• 

the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s and of the parent company’s affairs 
as at 31 March 2022 and of the group’s profit for the year then ended; 

the  group  financial  statements  have  been  properly  prepared  in  accordance  with  UK  adopted  International 
Accounting Standards; 

the  parent  company  financial  statements  have  been  properly  prepared  in  accordance  with  United  Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and 

the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 

Basis for opinion 

We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial 
statements section of our report. We are independent of the group and the parent company in accordance with the ethical 
requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as 
applied to listed entities and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. We 
believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. 

Summary of our audit approach 

Key audit matters 

Group 

•  Revenue recognition 
•  Inventory valuation and provisioning 

Parent Company 
• No key audit matters 

Materiality 

Group 

•  Overall materiality: £450,000 (2021: £375,000) 
•  Performance materiality: £337,000 (2021: 281,000) 

Parent Company 

•  Overall materiality: £331,000 (2021: £321,000) 
• Performance materiality: £248,000 (2021: 240,000) 

Scope 

Our audit procedures covered 80% of revenue, 90% of total assets and 86% 
of profit before tax. 

63 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

Key audit matters 

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in our audit of the group 
financial statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether 
or not due to fraud) we identified, including those which had the greatest effect on the overall audit strategy, the allocation 
of resources in the audit and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context 
of our audit of the group financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a 
separate opinion on these matters.  

We have determined the matters described below to be the key audit matters to be communicated in our report. 

Group key audit matters 

Revenue recognition 
Key  audit  matter 
description 

the  matter 
in 

How 
was  addressed 
the audit 

The risk – revenue recognition 

Refer to accounting policies and critical accounting judgements in notes 1 and 2 to the group 
financial statements and note 3.  

The group’s revenue comprises sales of electronic equipment to its customers after deductions 
for discounts and anticipated returns. There are also certain contracts where retentions have 
been received or where obligations are satisfied in stages.  

Revenue underpins the key measures of performance of the group.  

There is a risk that revenue could be misstated through: 

• 
• 
• 

inappropriate application of the group’s revenue recognition policies; 
recognition of revenue in the wrong period; or 
inaccurate estimates for returns. 

Our response 

We  assessed  whether  revenue  was  recognised  in  line  with  the  Group’s  revenue  recognition 
policies and IFRS 15.  

Our procedures included a combination of controls, data analytics and substantive testing. We 
selected a sample of items to check that revenue was recognised on shipment and that the cut-
off of revenue transactions around the year end was appropriate.  

We  critically  assessed  the  revenue  recognition  for  specific  contracts  where  revenue  is 
recognised  over  the  course  of  the  agreement  and  resulted  in  deferred  income,  including 
agreement of specific contractual terms. 

We evaluated the provision for returns by assessment of the level and nature of post year end 
credit notes.  

A selection of transactions posted to nominal ledger codes outside of the normal revenue cycle 
were identified using a data analytic tool and investigated. 

64 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

Group key audit matters 

Inventory valuation and provisioning 
Key  audit  matter 
description 

The risk – inventory valuation and provisioning 

Refer to accounting policies and critical accounting judgements in notes 1, 2 and 15.  

How  the  matter 
was addressed in 
the audit 

The  group  holds  a  combination  of  finished  goods  and  goods  for  re-sale,  together  with work  in 
progress. Finished goods and goods for re-sale comprise a range of bought-in and manufactured 
specialist electronic equipment. Work in progress is substantially the material cost of assemblies 
and manufactured products at varying stages of completion at the year end.  

The valuation of inventory, which  by its nature is specialist, involves judgement  relating to the 
potential obsolescence of inventory including net realisable value (NRV).  

The group has in place a policy for addressing this risk and recognises provisions accordingly. 

Our Response 

We attended and undertook physical inventory counts at key locations across the group, validating 
that inventory held was accurately recorded and was in good physical condition.  

We assessed the estimation techniques used and the appropriateness for the nature of inventory 
and  the  sector.  We  then  tested  the  year-end  inventory  provisioning  calculations  prepared  by 
management, including their arithmetical integrity.  

We  challenged  management  on  their  key  assumptions  and  obtained  justifications  from 
management on the assumptions adopted within the provisioning calculations and assessed any 
specific areas where a provision was considered necessary. We performed testing to ensure that 
the valuation of inventory was stated at the lower of cost or NRV by comparing the sales value of 
the products to their actual cost 

Parent company key audit matters 

We have determined that there are no key audit matters to communicate in our report. 

Our application of materiality 

When establishing our overall audit strategy, we set certain thresholds which help us to determine the nature, timing and 
extent of our audit procedures. When evaluating whether the effects of misstatements, both individually and on the 
financial statements as a whole, could reasonably influence the economic decisions of the users we take into account the 
qualitative nature and the size of the misstatements. Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality as 
follows: 

Group  

Parent company 

Overall materiality 

£450,000 (2021: £375,000) 

£331,000 (2021: £321,000) 

Basis for determining overall materiality 

6.5% of adjusted profit before tax  5% of net assets 

Rationale for benchmark applied 

Adjusted result before tax chosen 
as the Group is profit oriented 

Net assets chosen as the parent is 
a holding company 

Performance materiality 

£337,000 (2021: £281,000) 

£248,000 (2021: £240,000) 

Basis for determining performance 
materiality 

Reporting of misstatements to the Audit 
Committee 

75% of overall materiality 

75% of overall materiality 

in  excess  of 
Misstatements 
£22,500 
and  misstatements 
below that threshold that, in our 
view,  warranted  reporting  on 
qualitative grounds.  

in  excess  of 
Misstatements 
£16,500 
and  misstatements 
below that threshold that, in our 
view,  warranted  reporting  on 
qualitative grounds.  

65 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

An overview of the scope of our audit 

The group consists of 11 components, located in the United Kingdom, USA and Ireland.  

The coverage achieved by our audit procedures was: 

Full scope audit 

Specific audit procedures  

Total 

Number of 
components 
4 

1 

5 

Revenue 

Total assets 

Profit before tax 

80% 

-% 

80% 

86% 

4% 

90% 

86% 

-% 

86% 

Analytical procedures at group level were performed for the remaining 6 components.  

Specific audit procedures were performed in respect of 1 component relating to existence and valuation of inventory 
where inventory was considered material to the group.  

Conclusions relating to going concern  

In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in 
the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate. Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the group’s and 
parent company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting included: 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

obtaining and reviewing the cash flow forecasts prepared by management 

checking the mathematical accuracy of the cash flow forecasts 

reviewing  the  cash  flow  forecasts  in  light  of  our  understanding  of  the  business  and  current  wider  economic 
conditions and challenging the key assumptions within the forecasts 

considering  management’s  sensitivities  and  stressed  forecasts,  including  the  mitigating  actions  which  could  be 
taken 

considering the impact of the post balance sheet events and impact on forecasts for the alternative scenarios of 
the proposed acquisition being completed or otherwise 

In forming our assessment of going concern we have noted the profitable and cash generative position of the existing 
group, the strength of the balance sheet and the existing funding arrangements. We have also considered the alternative 
forecasts which include the anticipated funding arrangements to support the proposed acquisition.  

Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions 
that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the group’s or the parent company’s ability to continue as a 
going concern for a period of at least twelve months from when the financial statements are authorised for issue. 

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant 
sections of this report. 

66 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

Other information 

The other information comprises the information included in the annual report, other than the financial statements and 
our auditor’s report thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information contained within the annual report. 
Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly 
stated in our report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.  

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially 
inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit or otherwise appears to be 
materially misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to 
determine whether this gives rise to a material misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If, based on the work 
we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report 
that fact.  

We have nothing to report in this regard. 

Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit: 

• 

• 

the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the financial 
statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and 
the  Strategic  Report  and  the  Directors’  Report  have  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  applicable  legal 
requirements. 

Matters on which we are required to report by exception 

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and the parent company and their environment obtained in 
the course of the audit, we have not identified material misstatements in the Strategic Report or the Directors’ Report. 

We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to which the Companies Act 2006 requires us to 
report to you if, in our opinion: 

• 

adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have 
not been received from branches not visited by us; or 
• 
the parent company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or 
• 
certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 
•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit. 

Responsibilities of Directors 

As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement set out on page 62, the directors are responsible for the 
preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal 
control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. 

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the parent company’s 
ability  to  continue  as  a  going  concern,  disclosing,  as  applicable,  matters  related  to  going  concern  and  using  the  going 
concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the group or the parent company or to cease 
operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so. 

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements 

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement,  whether  due  to  fraud  or  error,  and  to  issue  an  auditor’s  report  that  includes  our  opinion.  Reasonable 
assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will 
always detect a  material misstatement  when it  exists. Misstatements can arise from  fraud or error and are considered 
material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users 
taken on the basis of these financial statements. 

67 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

The extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud 

Irregularities are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations.  The objectives of our audit are to obtain sufficient 
appropriate audit evidence regarding compliance with laws and regulations that have a direct effect on the determination 
of material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, to perform audit procedures to help identify instances of 
non-compliance with other laws and regulations that may have a material effect on the financial statements, and to respond 
appropriately to identified or suspected non-compliance with laws and regulations identified during the audit.   

In relation to fraud, the objectives of our audit are to identify and assess the risk of material misstatement of the financial 
statements  due  to  fraud,  to  obtain  sufficient  appropriate  audit  evidence  regarding  the  assessed  risks  of  material 
misstatement due to fraud through designing and implementing appropriate responses and to respond appropriately to 
fraud or suspected fraud identified during the audit.   

However, it is the primary responsibility of management, with the oversight of those charged with governance, to ensure 
that the entity’s operations are conducted in accordance with the provisions of laws and regulations and for the prevention 
and detection of fraud. 

In  identifying  and  assessing  risks  of  material  misstatement  in  respect  of  irregularities,  including  fraud,  the  group  audit 
engagement team:  

• 

• 

• 

obtained an understanding of the nature of the industry and sector, including the legal and regulatory frameworks 
that the group and parent company operate in and how the group and parent company are complying with the legal 
and regulatory frameworks; 
inquired of management, and those charged with governance, about their own identification and assessment of the 
risks of irregularities, including any known actual, suspected or alleged instances of fraud; 
discussed matters about non-compliance with laws and regulations and how fraud might occur including assessment 
of how and where the financial statements may be susceptible to fraud. 

The most significant laws and regulations were determined as follows: 

Legislation / 
Regulation 

IFRS, FRS102 and 
Companies Act 
2006 

Tax compliance 
regulations 

Export Control and 
International 
Traffic in Arms 
(ITAR) 

Health  and  safety 
legislation 

  Additional audit procedures performed by the audit engagement team included:  

 Review  of  the  financial  statement  disclosures  and  testing  to  supporting 
documentation; 

Completion of disclosure checklists to identify areas of non-compliance. 
 Inspection of advice received from external tax advisors 
Audit of the calculation of the research and development tax allowances to ensure 
suitably supported and in line with legislation.  
 ISAs limit the required audit procedures to identify non-compliance with these laws 
and regulations to inquiry of management and where appropriate, those charged 
with  governance  (as  noted  above)  and  inspection  of  legal  and  regulatory 
correspondence, if any. 
 ISAs limit the required audit procedures to identify non-compliance with these laws 
and regulations to inquiry of management and where appropriate, those charged 
with  governance  (as  noted  above)  and  inspection  of  legal  and  regulatory 
correspondence, if any. 

68 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

The areas that we identified as being susceptible to material misstatement due to fraud were: 

Risk 

Revenue 
recognition 

Management 
override of controls  

  Audit procedures performed by the audit engagement team:  

See key audit matters above.  

Testing the appropriateness of journal entries and other adjustments;  

Assessing  whether  the  judgements  made  in  making  accounting  estimates  are 
indicative of a potential bias; and 

Evaluating the business rationale of any significant transactions that are unusual or 
outside the normal course of business. 

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the Financial Reporting 
Council’s website at: http://www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report. 

Use of our report  

This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies 
Act 2006.  Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the company’s members those matters we are 
required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose.  To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do 
not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the company and the company’s members as a body, for our 
audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed. 

Ian Wall (Senior Statutory Auditor) 
For and on behalf of RSM UK Audit LLP, Statutory Auditor  
Chartered Accountants 
St Philips Point 
Temple Row 
Birmingham 
B2 5AF 

27 July 2022 

69 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 

        For the year ended 31 March 2022 

Revenue 
Cost of sales 

Gross profit 
Sales, general and administration expenses 

Operating profit 
Finance expense 

Profit before taxation 
Tax expense 

Adjusted profit after taxation 
Adjustments to profit 
Profit after taxation 

Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent 

Other comprehensive income 

Adjusted total comprehensive income 
Adjustments to total comprehensive income 
Total comprehensive income for the year 

Earnings per share 
Basic EPS from profit for the year 

Diluted EPS from profit for the year 

Notes 
3, 30 

4 
6 

7 

31 

7 

31 

8 

8 

2022 
£’000 
84,997 
(57,470) 
_______ 
27,527 
(23,801) 
_______ 
3,726 
(226) 
_______ 
3,500 
(977) 
_______ 
6,158 
(3,635) 
2,523 
_______ 
2,523 
_______ 
261 
_______ 
6,158 
(3,374) 
2,784 
_______ 

2022 
29.5p 

28.9p 

2021 
£’000 
66,281 
(46,362) 
_______ 
19,919 
(15,634) 
_______ 
4,285 
(85) 
_______ 
4,200 
(247) 
_______ 
4,733 
(780) 
3,953 
_______ 
3,953 
_______ 
- 
_______ 
4,733 
(780) 
3,953 
_______ 

2021 
46.4p 

45.7p 

Adjusted EPS measures are reported in note 8 to the accounts. 

All results presented for the current and comparative period are generated from continuing operations. 

The notes on pages 76 to 118 form part of these financial statements. 

70 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

Share 
Capital 
£’000 
428 

Share 
Premium 
Reserve 
£’000 
3,625 

Foreign 
Exchange 
Reserve 
£’000 
6 

Capital 
Redemption 
Reserve 
£’000 
5 

Retained 
Earnings 
£’000 
21,508 

Shares 
held in 
Treasury 
£’000 
(70) 

Total 
Equity 
£’000 
25,502 

2,784 

27 

295 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

2,784 

- 

295 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

27 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(80) 

(80) 

(93) 

93 

- 

(1,453) 

- 

(1,453) 

Balance at 31 March 2021 

Total comprehensive income 
for the year ended 31 March 
2022 

Foreign exchange 

Share based payment credit 

Transactions with owners in 
their capacity as owners 

Purchase of treasury shares 

Transfer of treasury shares 
to AESP 

Dividends 

Rounding 

- 
______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

1 
_______ 

- 
______ 

1 
______ 

Balance at 31 March 2022 

428 
______ 

3,625 
_______ 

33 
_______ 

5 
_______ 

23,042 
_______ 

(57) 
______ 

27,076 
______ 

The notes on pages 76 to 118 form part of these financial statements. 

71 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

Share 
Capital 
£’000 
427 

Share 
Premium 
Reserve 
£’000 
3,626 

Foreign 
Exchange 
Reserve 
£’000 
(7) 

Capital 
Redemption 
Reserve 
£’000 
5 

Retained 
Earnings 
£’000 
18,521 

Shares 
held in 
Treasury 
£’000 
(43) 

Total 
Equity 
£’000 
22,529 

3,953 

13 

171 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

3,953 

- 

171 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

13 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(95) 

(95) 

(68) 

68 

- 

(1,069) 

- 

(1,069) 

Balance at 31 March 2020 

Total comprehensive income 
for the year ended 31 March 
2021 

Foreign exchange 

Share based payment credit 

Transactions with owners in 
their capacity as owners 

Purchase of treasury shares 

Transfer of treasury shares 
to AESP 

Dividends 

Shares issued 

1 
______ 

(1) 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
______ 

- 
______ 

Balance at 31 March 2021 

428 
______ 

3,625 
_______ 

6 
_______ 

5 
_______ 

21,508 
_______ 

(70) 
______ 

25,502 
______ 

The notes on pages 76 to 118 form part of these financial statements. 

72 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 
at 31 March 2022 

Company Number: 00771335 

Notes 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

2022 

2021 

ASSETS 
NON-CURRENT ASSETS 
Property, plant and equipment 
Right of use lease assets 
Intangible assets 
Deferred tax asset 

TOTAL NON-CURRENT ASSETS 

CURRENT ASSETS 
Inventories 
Trade and other receivables 
Deferred tax asset 
Cash and cash equivalents 

TOTAL CURRENT ASSETS 

TOTAL ASSETS 

LIABILITIES 
CURRENT LIABILITIES 
Trade and other payables 
Contract liabilities 
Current borrowings 
Corporation tax liabilities 
Right of use lease liabilities 

TOTAL CURRENT LIABILITIES 

NON CURRENT LIABILITIES 
Non current borrowings 
Right of use lease liabilities 
Provisions 
Deferred tax liability 
Deferred consideration on acquisitions 

TOTAL NON-CURRENT LIABILITIES 

TOTAL LIABILITIES 

NET ASSETS 

10 
11 
12 
23 

15 
16 
23 
22 

17 
18 
19,21,22 

20 

19,21,22 
20 
24 
23 
22 

3,414 
1,983 
15,831 
539 
__________ 

17,598 
17,978 
- 
4,983 
____________, 

21,113 
3,461 
2,059 
531 
758 
___________ 

1,500 
1,326 
694 
1,832 
1,976 
___________ 

2,981 
2,476 
16,557 
- 
__________ 

21,767 

22,014 

31,953 
___________ 
53,967 
___________ 

40,559 
___________ 
62,326 
___________ 

10,629 
14,222 
188 
6,914 
____________ 

11,890 
2,299 
- 
801 
741 
___________ 

27,922 

15,731 

3,750 
1,802 
741 
1,491 
4,950 
___________ 

7,328 
____________ 
35,250 
____________ 
27,076 
____________ 

428 
3,625 
5 
33 
23,042 
(57) 
____________ 
27,076 
____________ 

12,734 
____________ 
28,465 
____________ 
25,502 
____________ 

428 
3,625 
5 
6 
21,508 
(70) 
____________ 
25,502 
____________ 

CAPITAL AND RESERVES ATTRIBUTABLE TO EQUITY HOLDERS OF THE PARENT 
Share capital 
Share premium reserve 
Capital redemption reserve 
Foreign exchange reserve 
Retained earnings 
Shares held in treasury 

25 
26 
26 
26 
26 
26, 27 

TOTAL EQUITY 

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 27 July 2022 and were signed 
on its behalf by:  

G S Marsh, Director      

          P O James, Director 

The notes on pages 76 to 118 form part of these financial statements. 
73 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

OPERATING ACTIVITIES 
Profit before taxation 
Adjustments for: 
Property Plant and equipment depreciation 
Right of use asset depreciation 
Amortisation 
Loss/(profit) on disposal of property, plant and equipment 
Share based payment expense 
Finance costs 
Recognition of increase in deferred contingent consideration 

Profit from operations before changes in working capital and 
provisions 
(Increase)/decrease in inventories 
(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables 
Increase/(decrease) in trade and other payables 
Decrease in provisions 

Cash generated from operations 
Income taxes paid 

Net cash inflow from operating activities 

INVESTING ACTIVITIES 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 
Capitalised own costs and purchase of intangible assets 
Proceeds of sales from property, plant and equipment 
Payments for acquisition of subsidiaries net of cash acquired  

Net cash outflow from investing activities 

FINANCING ACTIVITIES 
Repurchase of ordinary shares into treasury 
Borrowings drawn 
Borrowings repaid 
Principal payment obligations for right of use assets 
Interest paid 
Dividend paid to equity shareholders 

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing activities 

(Decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents 

22 

2022 

2021 

Notes 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

3,500 

4,200 

729 
763 
1,327 
3 
295 
226 
1,651 
  _______ 

8,494 

614 
497 
978 
(22) 
171 
85 
- 
  _______ 

6,523 

(6,922) 
(3,679) 
8,140 
(47) 
_______ 

1,852 
1,925 
(3,363) 
(7) 
  _______ 

(2,508) 
  _______ 
5,986 

407 
  _______ 
6,930 

(941) 
_______ 

(432) 
  _______ 

(941) 
  _______ 
5,045 

(432) 
  _______ 
6,498 

22 

22 
22 

6 

(1,178) 
(601) 
81 
(2,572) 
_______ 

(80) 
- 
(2,250) 
(871) 
(127) 
(1,453) 
_______ 

(356) 
(302) 
77 
(4,119) 
  _______ 

(4,270) 

(4,700) 

(95) 
3,750 
(333) 
(575) 
(37) 
(1,069) 
  _______ 

(4,781) 
  _______ 
(4,006) 
  _______ 

1,641 
  _______ 
3,439 
  _______ 

The notes on pages 76 to 118 form part of these financial statements. 

74 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 (continued) 

Translational foreign exchange on opening cash 
Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year 

2022 
£’000 

16 
(4,006) 
6,914 
_______ 

2,924 
_______ 

There were no significant non-cash transactions. Cash and cash equivalents comprise: 

Cash available on demand 
Overdraft facility  

Net cash and cash equivalents 

2022 
£’000 

5,045 
(2,121) 
_______ 

2,924 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

(42) 
3,439 
3,517 
_______ 

6,914 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

6,914 
- 
_______ 

6,914 
_______ 

The notes on pages 76 to 118 form part of these financial statements. 

75 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES  

Solid State PLC (“the Company”) is a public company incorporated, domiciled and registered in England and Wales 
in the United Kingdom. The registered number is 00771335 and the registered address is: 2 Ravensbank Business 
Park, Hedera Road, Redditch, B98 9EY. 

Basis of preparation 

The principal accounting policies adopted in the preparation of the financial statements are set out below.  These 
policies have been consistently applied to all the years presented. 

These financial statements have been prepared in accordance with UK adopted International Accounting Standards 
in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 (“IFRS”).   

The Group financial statements are presented in pounds sterling which is the functional and presentational currency 
of the Group and all values are rounded to the nearest thousand (£’000) except when otherwise indicated. 

Going concern 

In assessing the going concern position of the Group for the Consolidated Financial Statements for the year ended 
31 March 2022, the Directors have considered the Group’s cash flows, liquidity and business activities.  

At 31 March 2022, the Group had net cash at banks of £2.9m, an undrawn revolving credit facility (RCF) of £6.0m 
and a drawn RFF of £1.5m.  

Based  on  the  Group’s  forecasts,  the  Directors  have  adopted  the  going  concern  basis  in  preparing  the  Financial 
Statements. The Directors have made this assessment  after consideration of the  Group’s cash flows and related 
assumptions  and  in  accordance  with  the  Guidance  published  by  the  UK  Financial  Reporting  Council  (Risk 
Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting 2014, the April 2016 guidance on Going 
concern basis of accounting and reporting on solvency and liquidity risks and the various guidance issued in 2020). 
This guidance provides support to Directors and Board in making the assessment of going concern.  

In preparing the going concern assessment the Directors considered the principal risks and uncertainties that the 
business faced which have been disclosed on pages 12 to 16. Four areas have been identified as potentially more 
significant:  direct  supply  chain  disruption  limiting  our  ability  to  supply;  indirect  supply  chain  disruption  delaying 
customer programmes and demand; rising inflation and a further COVID-19 outbreak causing operational disruption. 
The Board concluded that the three areas of risk which remained the most uncertain were the direct and indirect 
supply chain disruption risks in addition to inflation. The Directors have given careful consideration to the potential 
impact of on-going global electronic component shortages and rising inflation on the cashflows and liquidity of the 
Group over the next 12 month period.  

Customer demand has remained solid and in the last financial year we have seen customers significantly extending 
order cover to help to manage the Global electronics supply chain issues. The most significant impact on the Group’s 
future performance is the continued and worsening uncertainty arising from the extending electronic component 
lead times.  

Management have taken all possible actions to minimise and mitigate the potential impact of this shortage, however 
the  impact  is  expected  to  continue  throughout  2022/23  and  potentially  into  2023/24.  While  the  actions  do  not 
mitigate the risk fully it still positions the Group to manage the impact as effectively as possible as demonstrated 
historically over the last two trading years. 

76 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Given the post year end announcement of the intention to acquire Custom Power is subject to shareholder approval 
on  the  29  July  2022,  albeit  the  directors  expect  to  receive  shareholder  support  for  the  transaction,  they  have 
considered the going concern position of the Group under both scenarios, being the deal is rejected or approved.  

The Directors have prepared revised “stressed” forecasts taking account of the results to date, current expected 
demand, and mitigating actions which could be taken, together with an assessment of the liquidity headroom against 
the cash and bank facilities. This includes the additional £13m term loan facilities provided by Lloyds bank to facilitate 
the acquisition of Custom Power and the equity fund raise (subject to shareholder approval).  

The Board’s evaluation of going concern was based on a minimum equity raise of £15m, therefore the additional 
shareholder support which has been  announced post year end, with the equity fund raise  expected to be in the 
region of £28.4m (subject to the take up of the open offer) significantly increases the funding headroom. 

The  bank  facilities  are  subject  to  financial  covenants  requiring  the  business  to  be  EBITDA  positive  therefore  this 
facility is available to fund investment in working capital, capital investment or acquisition activities.  

Should the business face such a significant downturn that it was loss making the facility would not be available to be 
drawn  to  fund  additional  losses  without  a  covenant  waiver  or  amendment.  Therefore,  in  evaluating  a  stressed 
forecast model the Board only included the RCF in the headroom to the extent it is available within the covenants. 

This financial modelling is based on applying various sensitivity scenarios to a base case to 30 September 2023 which 
has been prepared based on an extension of the budget for FY22/23. 

In the period since the year end the rolling 12 month order intake remains strong, maintaining a book to bill ratio of 
1.38, and reflects a continued improvement in order cover which does help to manage extending component lead 
times.  

In preparing a severe downside scenario with no overhead mitigation, it assumes a shortfall in Group revenue of 
~13% over 12 months period and a 2% margin erosion with limited cost mitigation. This results in EBITDA reducing 
by ~48% compared to the Board’s base case expectations. Even with this level of Group EBITDA reductions, when 
combined with the mitigating actions that are within the Group’s control, the Directors currently believe the Group 
would retain a reasonable cash surplus, comply with covenants and thus maintaining sufficient liquidity to meet its 
liabilities as they fall due.  

In considering the assessment of the Group’s going concern position the Directors have also identified that the Group 
could look to both the Group’s bankers and or the equity markets if additional liquidity were required. Albeit none 
of the sensitivities indicate that the Group would require additional sources of liquidity. 

In  the  post  balance  sheet  period,  the  Group  has  continued  to  build  up  the  inventory  level  to  ensure  customer 
demand can be met. In addition, the £4.6m short term deferred consideration on acquisitions was settled in Q1, 
partially utilising the RCF. The Group continues to focus on obtaining advanced customer deposits to manage the 
working capital  investment required to secure long lead time / short supply components. 

The Directors have concluded that the potential impact of the electronic component shortages and rising inflation 
as described above does not represent a material uncertainty over the Group and Company’s ability to continue as 
a going concern. Nevertheless, it is acknowledged that there are potentially material variations in the forecasted 
level of financial performance for the coming year. 

The  Directors  have  a  reasonable  expectation  that  the  Group  has  adequate  resources  to  continue  in  operational 
existence for the next 12 months, therefore it is appropriate to adopt a going concern basis for the preparation of 
the Financial Statements. Accordingly, these financial statements do not include any adjustments to the carrying 
amount or classification of assets and liabilities that would result if the Group and Company were unable to continue 
as a going concern.  

77 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022  

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Changes in accounting policy and disclosures 

New standards, amendments and interpretations adopted in the year. 

The following new standards, amendments and interpretations have been adopted by the Group for the first time 
for the financial year beginning on the 1 April 2021: 

•  Amendments to references to the Conceptual framework in IFRS Standards. 

•  Amendments to IFRS 9, IAS 39, IFRS 7: – Interest rate benchmark reform. 

The adoption of these standards and amendments has not had a material impact on the financial statements. 

New standards, amendments and interpretations to published standards issued but not yet effective and not early 
adopted 

A number of new standards, amendments and interpretations to existing standards have been published that  will 
be mandatory for the Group’s accounting periods beginning on or after 1 April 2022 or later periods and which the 
Group  has  decided  not  to adopt  early  are  listed  below.  The  Group  intends  to  adopt  these  standards  when  they 
become effective. 

•  Amendments to IAS 1 and IFRS Practice Statement 2, regarding the classification of liabilities and disclosure 

of accounting policies, effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2023. 

•  Amendments  to  IAS  8  regarding  the  definition  of  accounting  estimates,  effective  for  annual  reporting 

periods beginning on or after 1 January 2023. 

•  Amendments to IAS  12 regarding deferred tax on leases and decommissioning obligations, effective for 

annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2023. 

•  Amendments  to  IAS  16  regarding  deductions  from  the  cost  of  property,  plant  and  equipment  amounts 
received  from  selling  items  produced  while  the  company  is  preparing  the  asset  for  its  intended  use, 
effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2022. 

•  Amendments  to  IAS  37  regarding  the  costs  to  include  when  assessing  whether  a  contract  is  onerous, 

effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2022. 

•  Amendments to references to the Conceptual framework in IFRS Standards. 

The Directors anticipate that none of the new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations will have a 
significant effect on the financial statements of the Group. 

Principle of consolidation 

The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial results and position of the Parent and its subsidiaries. 

Subsidiaries  are  all  entities  over  which  the  Group  has  control.  The  Group  controls  an  entity  when  the  Group  is 
exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those 
returns through its power to direct the activities of the entity.  

Subsidiaries  are  fully  consolidated  from  the  date  on  which  control  is  transferred  to  the  Group.  They  are 
deconsolidated  from  the  date  that  control  ceases.  The  acquisition  method  of  accounting  is  used  to  account  for 
business combinations by the Group. 

Intercompany  transactions,  balances  and  unrealised  gains  on  transactions  between  Group  companies  are 
eliminated. Unrealised losses are also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence of an impairment of the 
transferred asset. Accounting policies of subsidiaries have been changed where necessary to ensure consistency 
with the policies adopted by the Group. 

Non-controlling interests in the results and equity of subsidiaries are shown separately in the consolidated statement 
of  comprehensive  income,  consolidated  statement  of  changes  in  equity  and  consolidated  statement  of  financial 
position respectively. 

78 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Business combinations 

The purchase method of accounting is used to account for all business combinations, regardless of whether equity 
instruments or other assets are acquired. Acquisition-related costs are expensed as incurred. 

The consideration transferred for the acquisition of a subsidiary comprises the: fair values of the assets transferred; 
liabilities incurred to the former owners of the acquired business; equity interests issued by the Group; fair value of 
any asset or liability resulting from a contingent consideration arrangement; and fair value of any pre-existing equity 
interest in the subsidiary. 

Identifiable assets acquired, and liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a business combination are, with 
limited  exceptions, measured initially  at their fair values at the acquisition date. The  Group recognises any non-
controlling interest in the acquired entity on an acquisition-by-acquisition basis either at fair value or at the non-
controlling interest’s proportionate share of the acquired entity’s net identifiable assets. 

The  excess  of  the:  consideration  transferred;  amount  of  any  non-controlling  interest  in  the  acquired  entity;  and 
acquisition-date  fair  value  of  any  previous  equity  interest  in  the  acquired  entity,  over  the  fair  value  of  the  net 
identifiable assets acquired, is recorded as goodwill.  

If those amounts are less than the fair value of the net identifiable assets of the business acquired, the difference is 
recognised directly in profit or loss as  a bargain purchase. Where settlement of any part of cash consideration is 
deferred, the amounts payable in the future are discounted to their present value as at the date of exchange. The 
discount rate used is the entity’s incremental borrowing rate, being the rate at which a similar borrowing could be 
obtained from an independent financier under comparable terms and conditions. 

Contingent consideration is classified either as equity or a financial liability. Amounts classified as a financial liability 
are subsequently remeasured to fair value with changes in fair value recognised in profit or loss. 

If the business combination is achieved in stages, the acquisition date carrying value of the acquirer’s previously held 
equity interest in the acquiree is remeasured to fair value at the acquisition date. Any gains or losses arising from 
such remeasurement are recognised in profit or loss. 

Impairment of non-financial assets 

Non financial assets that have an indefinite useful life (e.g. Goodwill) or other intangible assets which are not ready 
to use and therefore not subject to amortisation (e.g. ongoing incomplete R&D programmes) are reviewed at least 
annually for impairment. 

Impairment tests on goodwill are undertaken annually on 31 March, and on other non-financial assets whenever 
events or changes in circumstances indicate that their carrying value may not be reasonable. Where the carrying 
value of an asset exceeds its recoverable amount (i.e. the higher of value in use and fair value less costs to sell), the 
asset is written down accordingly. 

Impairment  charges are included in sales, general and administration expenses in the consolidated statement of 
comprehensive  income,  except  to  the  extent  that  they  reverse  gains  previously  recognised  in  the  consolidated 
statement of recognised income and expense. An impairment loss recognised for goodwill is not reversed. 

79 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Intangible Assets 

a) Goodwill 

Goodwill arising on an acquisition is recognised as an asset and initially measured at cost, being the excess of the 
fair  value  of  the  consideration  over  the  fair  value  of  the  identifiable  assets,  liabilities  and  contingent  liabilities 
acquired. Goodwill is not  amortised. However,  it is reviewed for potential impairment  at least  annually or more 
frequently  if  events  or  circumstances  indicate  a  potential  impairment.  For  the  purpose  of  impairment  testing, 
goodwill is allocated to each of the Cash Generating Units to which is relates. Any impairment identified is charged 
directly  to  consolidated  statement  of  comprehensive  income.  Subsequent  reversals  of  impairment  losses  for 
goodwill are not recognised. 

b) Development costs 

Expenditure incurred that is directly attributable to the development of new or substantially improved products or 
processes is recognised as an intangible asset when the following criteria are met: 

• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 

the product or process is intended for use or sale; 
the development is technically feasible to complete; 
there is an ability to use or sell the product or process; 
it can be demonstrated how the product or process will generate probable future economic benefits; 
there are adequate technical, financial and other resources to complete the development; and 
the development expenditure can be reliably measured. 

Directly attributable costs refers to the materials consumed; the directly attributable labour; and the incremental 
overheads incurred in the development activity. General operating costs, administration costs and selling costs do 
not form part of directly attributable costs.  

All research and other development costs are expensed as incurred.  

Capitalised development costs are amortised on a straight line basis over the period, during which the economic 
benefits are expected to be received, which typically range between 1 and 5 years. Amortisation expense is included 
within sales, general and administration expenses in the statement of comprehensive income. 

The estimated remaining useful lives of development costs are reviewed at least on an annual basis. Amortisation 
commences once the project is completed and revenues are being generated.  

The carrying value of capitalised development costs is reviewed for potential impairment at least annually, or more 
frequently  if  events  or  circumstances  indicate  a  potential  impairment.  Any  impairment  identified  is  immediately 
charged to the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.  

c) Software 

Externally acquired software assets are initially recognised at cost and subsequently amortised on a straight-line 
basis over their useful economic lives. Cost includes all directly attributable costs of acquisition. In addition, directly 
attributable costs incurred in the development of bespoke software for the Group’s own use are capitalised.  

The useful economic life over which the software is being amortised has been assessed to be 3 to 5 years. 

The  carrying  value  of  capitalised  software  costs  is  reviewed  for  potential  impairment  at  least  annually,  or  more 
frequently  if  events  or  circumstances  indicate  a  potential  impairment.  Any  impairment  identified  is  immediately 
charged to the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.  

The costs of maintaining internally developed software, and annual licence fees to utilise third party software, are 
expensed as incurred. 

80 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Intangible Assets (continued)  

d) Other intangibles 

Other intangible assets are those which arise on business combinations in accordance with IFRS 3 revised. These 
intangible assets form part of the identifiable net assets of an acquired business and are recognised at their fair value 
and amortised on a systematic basis over their useful economic life which is typically 5 to 10 years. This includes 
customer relationships, the fair value of which has been evaluated using the multi period excess earnings method 
“MEEM”.  

The MEEM model valuation was cross checked to the cost of product development and customer qualification to 
which the relationships relate.  

Capitalised acquisition intangibles are amortised on a straight line basis over the period, during which the economic 
benefits  are  expected  to  be  received,  which  typically  range  between  5  and  10  years.  Amortisation  expense  is 
included within sales, general and administration expenses in the statement of comprehensive income. 

The  carrying  value  of  other  intangible  assets  is  reviewed  for  potential  impairment  at  least  annually,  or  more 
frequently  if  events  or  circumstances  indicate  a  potential  impairment.  Any  impairment  identified  is  immediately 
charged to the consolidated statement of comprehensive income. 

Property, plant and equipment 

Property,  plant  and  equipment  is  stated  at  historical  cost  or  deemed  cost  where  IFRS  1  exemptions  have  been 
applied, less accumulated depreciation and any recognised impairment losses. 

Costs include the original purchase price of the asset and the costs attributable to bringing the asset to its working 
condition for its intended use including any qualifying finance expenses. 

Depreciation is provided on all items of property, plant and equipment to write off the carrying value of items over 
their expected useful economic lives.  It is applied at the following rates: 

• Short leasehold property improvements- straight line over minimum life of lease 
• Fittings and equipment- 25% per annum on a reducing balance basis or a straight line basis over 3 to 5 years 

with an appropriate residual value as considered most appropriate  

• Computers- between 20% and 33.3% per annum on a straight-line basis 
• Motor vehicles- 25% per annum on a reducing balance basis 

The residual values and useful lives of the assets are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet 
date. An asset’s carrying amount is written down immediately to its recoverable amount if its carrying amount is 
greater than its estimated net realisable value. Gains and losses on disposal are determined by comparing proceeds 
with carrying amounts. These are included in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income. 

Leases 

IFRS 16 “Leases” addresses the definition of a lease, the recognition and measurement of leases and establishes the 
principles for the reporting useful information to users of the financial statements about the leasing activities of 
both lessees and lessors. 

The Group has applied judgement to determine the lease term for some lease contracts in which as  lessee there 
includes  a  renewal  option.  The  assessment  of  whether  the  Group  is  reasonably  certain  to  exercise  such  options 
impacts the lease term, which affects the amount of lease liabilities and right-of-use assets recognised. 

The lease liability reflects the present value of the future rental payments and interest, discounted using either the 
effective interest rate or the incremental borrowing rate of the entity. 

Payments associated with short-term leases and leases of low value assets are recognised on a straight-line basis 
over the lease term as an expense within the income statement.  

81 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022  

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Right-of-use assets 

The Group recognises right-of-use assets at the commencement date of the lease (i.e., the date the underlying 
asset  is  available  for  use).  Right-of-use  assets  are  measured  at  cost,  less  any  accumulated  depreciation  and 
impairment  losses  and  adjusted  for  any  remeasurement  of  lease  liabilities.  The  cost  of  right-of-use  assets 
includes the amount of lease liabilities recognised, initial direct costs incurred, and lease payments made at or 
before  the  commencement  date  less  any  lease  incentives  received.  Right-of-use  assets  are  related  to  the 
property leases, plant and machinery and motor vehicles and are depreciated on a straight-line basis over the 
lease term. 

Right of use lease liabilities 

At the commencement date of the lease, the Group recognises lease liabilities measured at the present value of 
lease  payments  to  be  made  over  the  lease  term.  The  lease  payments  include  lease  payments  less  any  lease 
incentives  receivable.  In  calculating  the  present  value  of  lease  payments,  the  Group  uses  its  incremental 
borrowing rate at the lease commencement date because the interest rate implicit in the lease is not readily 
determinable.  

After the commencement date, the amount of lease liabilities is increased to reflect the accretion of interest and 
reduced for the lease payments made. In addition, the carrying amount of lease liabilities is remeasured if there 
is a modification, a change in the lease term or a change in the lease payments (e.g., changes to future payments 
resulting from a change in an index or rate used to determine such lease payments). 

Inventories 

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is based on either average purchase cost 
or the cost of purchase on a first in, first out basis which is the most appropriate for the category of inventory. 
Work in progress and finished goods include labour and attributable overheads.  Net realisable value is based on 
estimated selling price less any additional costs to completion and disposal. 

Financial Instruments  

Classification and measurement of financial instruments under IFRS9 classifies financial assets as either held at 
amortised  cost,  fair  value  through  other  comprehensive  income  (FVOCI)  or  fair  value  through  profit  or  loss, 
dependent on the business model and cash flow characteristics of the financial instrument. 

Financial  assets  and  financial  liabilities  are  recognised  when  the  company  becomes  party  to  the  contractual 
provisions of the instrument. 

Trade and other receivables 

Trade receivables are initially measured at their transaction price. Other receivables are initially recognised at 
fair value plus transaction costs. 

Receivables are held to collect the contractual cash flows which are solely payments of principal and interest. 
Therefore,  these  receivables  are  subsequently  measured  at  amortised  cost  using  the  effective  interest  rate 
method. 

The effect of discounting on these financial instruments is not considered to be material. 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents include cash at bank and in hand and highly liquid interest-bearing securities with 
maturities of  three  months  or  less. Bank  overdrafts  are shown  within borrowings  in  current  liabilities  on  the 
balance sheet. 

82 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Impairment of financial assets 

IFRS 9 requires an expected credit loss (‘ECL’) model which broadens the information that an entity is required 
to  consider  when  determining  its  expectations  of  impairment.  Under  this  new  model,  expectations  of  future 
events must be taken into account and this will result in the earlier recognition of potential impairments. 

An impairment loss is recognised for the expected credit losses on financial assets when there is an increased 
probability  that  the  counterparty  will  be  unable  to  settle  an  instrument’s  contractual  cash  flows  on  the 
contractual due dates, a reduction in the amounts expected to be recovered, or both. 

The probability of default and expected amounts recoverable are assessed using reasonable and supportable 
past and forward-looking information that is available without undue cost or effort.  The expected credit loss is 
a probability-weighted amount determined from a range of outcomes and takes into account the time value of 
money. 

Impairment of trade receivables 

For trade receivables, expected credit losses are measured by applying an expected loss rate to the gross carrying 
amount.  The expected loss rate comprises the risk of a default occurring and the expected cash flows on default 
based on the aging of the receivable.   

The risk of a default occurring always takes into consideration all possible default events over the expected life 
of those receivables (“the lifetime expected credit losses”). Different provision rates and periods are used based 
on groupings of historic credit loss experience by product type, customer type and location. 

Impairment of other receivables 

The  measurement  of 
‘performing’, 
‘underperforming’ or ‘non-performing’ based on the company’s assessment of increases in the credit risk of the 
financial asset since its initial recognition and any events that have occurred before the year-end which have a 
detrimental impact on cash flows. 

losses  depends  on  whether  the  financial  asset 

impairment 

is 

The financial asset moves from ‘performing’ to ‘underperforming’ when the increase in credit risk since initial 
recognition becomes significant. 

In assessing whether credit risk has increased significantly, the company compares the risk of default at the year-
end with the risk of a default when the investment was originally recognised using reasonable and supportable 
past and forward-looking information that is available without undue cost. 

The risk of a default occurring takes into consideration default events that are possible within 12 months of the 
year-end (“the 12-month expected credit losses”) for ‘performing’ financial assets, and all possible default events 
over the expected life of those receivables (“the lifetime expected credit losses”) for ‘underperforming’ financial 
assets. 

Impairment losses and any subsequent reversals of impairment losses are adjusted against the carrying amount 
of the receivable and are recognised in profit or loss. 

Financial Liabilities and equity 

Financial  liabilities  and  equity  instruments  are  classified  according  to  the  substance  of  the  contractual 
arrangements entered into. 

An  equity  instrument  is  any  contract  that  evidences  a  residual  interest  in  the  assets  of  the  company  after 
deducting all of its liabilities. 

Financial liabilities are classified as either: 

• 
• 

Financial liabilities at amortised cost; or 
Financial liabilities as at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL). 

All financial liabilities are measured at amortised cost and include: 

Trade and other payables 
Contract liabilities 

• 
• 
•  Borrowings 
• 

Lease liabilities 

83 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Trade payables 

Trade payables are obligations to pay for goods or services that have been acquired in the ordinary course of 
business from suppliers. 

Accounts payable are classified as current liabilities if payment is due within one year or less (or in the normal 
operating cycle of the business if longer). If not, they are presented as non-current liabilities.  

They are initially recognised at fair value net of direct transaction costs and subsequently held at amortised cost. 

Contract liabilities 

Contract liabilities comprise payments in advance of revenue recognition and revenue deferred due to contract 
performance obligation not being completed.  

They are classified as current liabilities if the contract performance obligations payment are due to be completed 
within one year or less (or in the normal operating cycle of the business if longer). If not, they are presented as 
noncurrent liabilities.  

Contract liabilities are recognised initially at fair value, and subsequently stated at amortised cost. 

Borrowings 

Borrowings  are  recognised  initially  at  fair  value,  net  of  transaction  costs  incurred  and  subsequently stated  at 
amortised cost. Borrowing costs are expensed using the effective interest method. 

Equity instruments and Share capital 

Ordinary shares are classified as equity.  

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options are shown in equity as a deduction, 
net of tax, from the proceeds. 

Treasury Shares 

Where  any  Group  company  purchases  the  Parent  Company’s  equity  share  capital  (treasury  shares),  the 
consideration paid, including any directly attributable incremental costs (net of income taxes), is deducted from 
equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders until the shares are cancelled, reissued or disposed of. 

These  shares  are  held  in  a  separate  negative  reserve  in  the  capital  section  of  the  consolidated  statement  of 
financial position. Any dividends payable in relation to these shares are cancelled. 

Where such shares are subsequently sold or reissued, any consideration received, net of any directly attributable 
incremental  transaction  costs  and  the  related  income  tax  effects,  is  included  in  equity  attributable  to  the 
Company’s equity holders. 

Dividends 

Equity dividends are recognised when they become legally payable. Interim dividends are recognised when paid. 
Final dividends are recognised when approved by the shareholders at an annual general meeting. 

Adjusted performance metrics and non-recurring charges / credits 

Nonrecurring charges / credits are disclosed separately in the financial statements where it is necessary to do so 
to provide further understanding of the financial performance of the Group. Transactions are classified as non-
recurring where they relate to an event that falls outside of the ordinary activities of the business and where 
individually or in aggregate, they have a material impact on the financial statements.  

In presenting our adjusted performance metrics we also exclude the  non-cash charges/credits that relates to 
acquisition accounting and share based payments and the associated tax effect of these items. 

84 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Foreign currency 

Transactions  entered  into  by  Group  entities  in  a  currency  other  than  the  currency  of  the  primary  economic 
environment in which it operates are recorded at the rates ruling when the transactions occur.  Foreign currency 
monetary  assets  and  liabilities  are  retranslated  at  the  rates  ruling  at  the  balance  sheet  date.    Exchange 
differences arising are recognised in the statement of comprehensive income. 

Revenue  

The Group manufactures and distributes a range of electronic equipment. Revenue comprises sales to external 
customers after discounts, excluding value added taxes. 

The Group’s performance obligations with respect to physical goods is to deliver a finished product to a customer. 

Revenue is recognised when control of the products has transferred, being when the products are delivered to 
the customer, the customer has full control over the products supplied, and there is no unfulfilled obligation that 
could affect the customer’s acceptance of the products.  

Delivery occurs when the products have been shipped to the specific location, the risks of obsolescence and loss 
have been transferred to the customer, and either the customer has accepted the products in accordance with 
the sales contract, the acceptance provisions have lapsed, or the Group has objective evidence that all criteria 
for acceptance have been satisfied. 

Where  performance  obligations  have  not  be  satisfied  at  the  reporting  date  any  advanced  payments  are 
recognised as contract liabilities. 

For goods that are subject to bill and hold arrangements this means: 

• 
• 

the goods are complete and ready for collection; 
the  goods  are  separately  identified  from  the  Group’s  other  stock  and  are  not  used  to  fulfil  any  other 
orders;  

•  and the customer has specifically requested that the goods be held pending collection. 

Normal payment terms apply to the bill and hold arrangements. 

Revenue is only recognised to the extent that it is highly probable that a significant reversal will not occur.  

No element of financing is deemed present as the sales are made with a credit term of 30 to 90 days, which is 
consistent with market practice. The Group does not expect to have any contracts where the period between 
the transfer of the promised goods or services to the customer and payment by the customer exceeds one year. 
As a consequence, the Group does not adjust any of the transaction prices for the time value of money. 

The Group’s obligation to provide a refund for faulty products under the standard warranty terms is recognised 
as a returns provision. A receivable is recognised when the goods are delivered as this is the point in time that 
the consideration is unconditional because only the passage of time is required before the payment is due. 

Segmental reporting 

Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the Executive 
Directors, who are responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the operating segments.  

A business segment is a group of assets and operations engaged in providing products or services that are subject 
to risks and returns that are different from those of other business segments.  

A geographical segment is engaged in providing products or services within a particular economic environment 
that  are  subject  to  risks  and  returns  that  are  different  from  those  of  segments  operating  in  other  economic 
environments.  

The Executive Directors assess the performance of the operating segments based on the measures of revenue, 
Profit Before Taxation (PBT) and Profit After Taxation (PAT). Central overheads are not allocated to the business 
segments. 

85 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022  

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Government Grants 

Income  received  from  government  grants  is  recognised  as  ‘Other  Income’  within  operating  profit  in  the 
Statement  of  Comprehensive  Income  in  the  same  period  as  the  staff  costs  to  which  the  income  relates. 
Government grant income is only recognised once there is reasonable assurance both that the Group will comply 
with any conditions and that the grant will be received. The Group utilised the UK Government‘s Coronavirus Job 
Retention Scheme, ‘furlough scheme’, during the COVID-19 pandemic.  

Pensions  

The  pension  schemes  operated  by  the  Group  are  defined  contribution  schemes.  The  pension  cost  charge 
represents the contributions payable by the Group.  

Current and deferred taxation 

Income tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. 

Taxable profit differs from accounting profit because it excludes certain items of income and expense that are 
recognised in the financial statements but are treated differently for tax purposes. Current tax is the amount of 
tax expected to be payable or receivable on the taxable profit or loss for the current period. This amount is then 
amended for any adjustments in respect of prior periods. 

Current  tax  is  calculated  using  tax  rates  that  have  been  written  into  law  (‘enacted’)  or  irrevocably 
announced/committed by the respective Government (‘substantively enacted’) at the period-end date. Current 
tax receivable (assets) and payable (liabilities) are offset only when there is a legal right to settle them net and 
the entity intends to do so. This is generally true when the taxes are levied by the same tax authority. 

Because of the differences between accounting and taxable profits and losses reported in each period, temporary 
differences arise on the amount certain assets and liabilities are carried at for accounting purposes and their 
respective tax values. Deferred tax is the amount of tax payable or recoverable on these temporary differences. 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised where the carrying amount of an asset or liability in the balance 
sheet differs from its tax base, except for differences arising on: 

• 
• 

• 

the initial recognition of goodwill 
the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction which is not a business combination and at 
the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor taxable profit: and 
investments in subsidiaries and jointly controlled entities where the Group is able to control the timing 
of the reversal of the difference and it is probable the difference will not  reverse in the foreseeable 
future. 

Recognition of deferred tax assets is restricted to those instances where it is probable that taxable profit will be 
available against which the differences can be utilised. 

The amount of the asset or liability is determined using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted 
by  the  balance  sheet  date  and  are  expected  to  apply  when  the  deferred  tax  liabilities/(assets)  are 
settled/(recovered). 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when the Group has a legally enforceable right to offset current tax 
assets and liabilities, and the deferred tax assets and liabilities relate to taxes levied by the same tax authority. 

86 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Share based payment 

Where share options are awarded to employees, the fair value of the options at the date of grant is charged to 
the consolidated statement of comprehensive income over the vesting period.  Non-market vesting conditions 
are taken into account by adjusting the number of equity instruments expected to vest at each statement of 
financial position date so that, ultimately, the cumulative amount recognised over the vesting period is based on 
the number of options that eventually vest. Market vesting conditions are factored into the fair value of options 
granted. As long as all other vesting conditions are satisfied, a charge is made irrespective of whether the market 
vesting conditions are satisfied. The cumulative expense is not adjusted for failure to achieve a market vesting 
condition. 

Where the terms and conditions of options are modified before they vest, the increase in the fair value of the 
options, measured immediately before and after the modification, is also charged to the consolidated statement 
of comprehensive income over the remaining vesting period. 

87 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

2. 

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND JUDGEMENTS 

The preparation of financial statements requires the use of accounting estimates which, by definition, will seldom 
equal  the  actual  results.  Management  also  needs  to  exercise  judgement  in  applying  the  Group’s  accounting 
policies. This note provides an overview of the areas that involved a higher degree of judgement or complexity, 
and of items which are more likely to be materially adjusted due to estimates and assumptions turning out to be 
wrong.  

Acquisition accounting  

In accounting for the Active Silicon  acquisition in accordance with IFRS 3 the key judgement relates to the fair 
value of the deferred contingent consideration  at the balance sheet date. The 25 month deferred contingent 
consideration was originally recognised in the comparative period at a total of £1.45m based the budgeted and 
forecast profit after tax expectations.  

The Active Silicon acquisition outperformed the current year budget expectation by 220% after achieving all-time 
record  company  revenues  and  resulting  profits  for  the  financial  year.  The  shift  from  initial  assumptions  was 
driven  by  customer  demand  and  order  placement  not  only  recovering  post  COVID-19  but  achieving 
unprecedented levels, despite component shortages. Subsequent to year end, a cash payment of £1.13m was 
settled in relation to the first 13 month tranche of deferred consideration.  

Based on the Active Silicon open orderbook, the performance to date in Q1 and management expectations for 
the full 2023 financial year, the total carrying value of the deferred contingent consideration has been increased 
by  £1.65m  to  £3.1m.  The  key  assumption  for  2023  is  the  expected  revenue  based  on  existing  and  expected 
customer  orders.  Should  the  post-tax  profit  metric  be  10%  higher  than  assumed,  the  deferred  contingent 
consideration will also increase by 10%. The increase has been expensed to the income statement and treated 
as a non-recurring adjustment to profit (as per Note 31).  

The  revised  deferred  consideration  balance  is  considered  prudent  and  reasonable  by  the  Directors  based  on 
forecasts calculated on the information currently available. This is a judgemental estimate based on performance 
and key market changes, including component shortages and macro-economic factors, may result a difference 
between the estimation and final payment.  

Expected credit losses  

In accordance with IFRS 9 the Group is required to assess the expected credit loss occurring over the life of its 
trade receivables. As a result of the continued component shortages and rising inflation across the globe the 
Directors expect that the risk of credit default continues to be higher than historical norms. However, the COVID-
19 business disruption risk has reduced. 

As  a  result,  the  Directors  have  made  a  judgemental  assessment  of  the  potential  credit  losses  in  the  current 
business environment. In these financial statements the Directors have provided full disclosures of the provisions 
for credit default in note 21. 

The calculation of the provision based on the Directors judgemental assessment of expected credit loss reflects 
no change to the overall figure from 2021 of £0.65m.  

Recognition criteria for capitalisation of development expenditure 

The Group capitalises R&D in accordance with IAS 38. There is judgement in respect of when R&D projects meet 
the requirement for capitalisation, which internal costs are directly attributable and therefore appropriate to 
capitalise and when the development programme is complete, and capitalisation should cease.  

Amounts  capitalised  include  the  total  cost  of  any  external  products  or  services  and  labour  costs  directly 
attributable  to  the  development  programme.  Management  judgement  is  involved  in  determining  the 
appropriate internal costs to capitalise and the amounts involved. 

If there is any uncertainty in terms of the technical feasibility, ability to sell the product or any other risk that 
means the programme does not meet the requirements of the standard the R&D costs are expensed within the 
consolidated statement of comprehensive income.  

88 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

For the year ended 31 March 2022 

2. 

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND JUDGEMENTS – (Continued) 

Estimated useful life of research and development and intangible assets arising on acquisitions 

The  periods  of  amortisation  adopted  to  write  down  capitalised  product  and  process  development  requires 
estimates to be made in respect of the useful economic lives of the intangible assets to determine an appropriate 
amortisation rate.  

Capitalised development costs are amortised over the period during which economic benefits are expected to 
be received which is typically 1 – 5 years. Intangible assets arising on acquisitions are amortised straight line over 
the period during which economic benefits are expected to be received which is typically 5 – 10 years. 

The amortisation charge for capitalised development costs in the current year is £250k; if the lives were reduced 
by one year across all the projects which are being amortised the charge would increase by circa £100k.  

The amortisation charge for intangible assets arising on acquisitions in the 2021 comparative year is £772k; if the 
lives were reduced by one year the charge would increase by £129k.  

Estimation of level of R&D expenditure which is eligible for R&D tax credits under the SME and large 
company scheme. 

Uncertainties exist in relation to the interpretation of complex tax legislation, changes in tax laws and the amount 
and timing of future taxable income. This could necessitate future adjustments to taxable income and expense 
already recorded.  

At the year-end date, tax liabilities and assets reflect management’s judgements in respect of the application of 
the tax regulations, in particular the R&D tax. 

In assessing our year-end corporation tax liability, we have made a provisional assessment as to the likely amount 
of development  expenditure  that will be eligible under each of the HMRCs large company and SME R&D tax 
credit schemes as the detailed tax computations have not been completed.  

Our judgement at year end assumed that the level of eligible spend was comparable with prior years. At 31 March 
2022 there are net current and deferred tax provisions totalling approximately £1.8m (2021: £2.1m).  

Due to the uncertainties noted above, it is possible that the Group’s initial estimates are different to the final 
position adopted when the tax computation is finalised, resulting in a different tax payable or recoverable from 
the amounts provided. 

Provisions for slow moving or obsolete inventories 

Inventories are carried at the lower of cost and net realisable value (NRV). NRV is reviewed in detail on an  on-
going basis and provision for obsolete inventory is made based on several factors including age of inventories, 
the risk of technical obsolescence, the risk that customers default on customised product and the expected future 
usage.  

This estimate is considered highly judgemental given the deliberate investment in inventory during the financial 
year to mitigate the challenge presented by market component shortages.  An element of working capital risk 
can be mitigated with receiving advance customer deposits, however there remains a risk of default and order 
cancellation. 

Differences between such estimates and actual market conditions may have a material impact on the amount of 
the carrying value of inventories and may result in adjustments to cost of sales. See note 15 for details of the 
inventory provisions and the amounts written off to the consolidated statement of comprehensive income in the 
year.   

89 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

3. 

REVENUE 

The Group derives revenue from the transfer of goods at a point in time in the following major product lines and 
geographical regions:  

United Kingdom 
Rest of Europe 
Asia 
North America 
Rest of World 

Total revenue 

Computing products 
Communications products 
Power products 
Opto electronic and electronic components and modules 

Total revenue 

See further segmental disclosures in note 30. 

2022 
£’000 

53,030 
15,726 
6,542 
9,175 
524 
_______ 

84,997 
_______ 

2022 
£’000 

16,103 
7,745 
8,681 
52,468 
_______ 

84,997 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

46,301 
7,349 
3,342 
9,148 
141 
_______ 

66,281 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

10,643 
5,678 
10,978 
38,982 
_______ 

66,281 
_______ 

90 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

4. 

PROFIT FROM OPERATIONS 

This has been arrived at after charging/(crediting): 

Staff costs excluding share based payments (see note 5) 
Share based payment expenses 
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 
Depreciation of right of use asset 
Amortisation of intangible assets 
Loss/(profit) on disposal of property, plant and equipment 
Auditors’ remuneration: 

Audit fees 
Other assurance fees 
Non audit fees: 
Corporate finance services 
Other advisory services 

2022 
£’000 

16,562 
295 
729 
763 
1,327 
3 

120 
- 

2021 
£’000 

11,656 
171 
614 
497 
978 
(26) 

123 
- 

Research and development costs (includes relevant staff costs) 
Foreign exchange (credit)/expense 
Stock write downs/(backs) 
Acquisition of subsidiaries legal and due diligence * 
Other Income from government grants **  

48 
3 
1,664 
564 
(5) 
194 
(297) 
_______ 
* 2022 relates to the post year end planned acquisition of Custom Power. 2021 includes the £48k corporate finance fees from the Group 
auditors as disclosed and £155k from other professional services firms. 

- 
6 
2,044 
(33) 
59 
533 
(2) 
_______ 

** Furlough scheme in 2021 

The foreign exchange differences have been treated as an adjustment to cost of sales rather than as an overhead 
as they arise from sales income and cost of sales expenditures. 

Details  of  transactions  with  businesses  associated  with  the  Directors  are  included  within  the  Remuneration 
Committee report on pages 46 to 58. 

91 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022  

5. 

STAFF COSTS 

Staff costs for all employees during the year, including the Executive Directors, were as follows: 

Wages and salaries 
Social security costs 
Pension costs 
Share based payment charges 

Total staff costs 

2022 
£’000 

13,985 
1,377 
1,200 
295 
_______ 

16,857 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

9,751 
1,012 
893 
171 
_______ 

11,827 
_______ 

Wages and salaries include termination costs of £56k (2021: £69k). 

The average monthly number of employees during the year, including the Executive Directors, was as follows: 

Selling and distribution 
Manufacturing and assembly 
Management and administration 

2022 
Number 

134 
110 
59 
_______ 

303 
_______ 

2021 
Number 

112 
103 
30 
_______ 

245 
_______ 

In the previous year a formalised senior management team was formed and included with the Company Share 
Option Plan. As the Group continues to grow, we continue to invest in and develop the senior leadership team 
which are considered to be key management. This senior management team, which includes executive Directors. 
The key management team and their total compensation, including employers NI, totals £3,857k (2021: £2,981k). 

6. 

FINANCE EXPENSE 

Bank borrowings 
Interest on lease liabilities 

Total finance expense 

2022 
£’000 

127 
99 
______ 

226 
______ 

2021 
£’000 

37 
48 
______ 

85 
______ 

92 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

7. 

TAX EXPENSE 

Analysis of total tax expense 
Total tax charge 

Current tax expense 

Group corporation tax on profits for the year 
Adjustment in respect of prior periods 

Deferred tax expense/(credit) charged to income statement 

Total tax charge to income statement 

Deferred tax (credit)/expense charged to other comprehensive income 

2022 
£’000 

2021 
£’000 

716 
_______ 

247 
_______ 

716 
______ 

247 
______ 

735 
(8) 
_______ 
727 
250 
______ 
977 

610 
(182) 
_______ 
428 
(181) 
______ 
247 

(261) 
______ 

- 
______ 

Total tax charge to comprehensive income 

247 
______ 
The reasons for the difference between the actual tax charge for the year and the standard rate of corporation 
tax in the UK applied to profits for the year are as follows: 

716 
______ 

Profit before tax  

Expected tax charge based on the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 19% 
(2021: 19%) 
Effect of: 
Expenses not deductible for tax purposes 
Difference between depreciation/amortisation for the year and capital allowances 
Tax relief on exercise of share options exercised 
Enhanced relief on research and development expenditure 
Overseas tax rate differences 
Deferred tax asset recognised 
Change in rate in respect of deferred tax recognition 
Adjustments in respect of prior years 
Foreign exchange 

Total tax charge 

2022 
£’000 
3,500 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 
4,200 
_______ 

665 

798 

443 
(60) 
- 
(483) 
8 
(226) 
343 
(9) 
35 
_______ 

20 
(3) 
(11) 
(366) 
3 
(10) 
- 
(182) 
(2) 
_______ 

716 
_______ 

247 
_______ 

The UK corporation tax rate is 19% (effective from 1 April 2017). Amendments were substantively enacted on 24 
May 2021, so the rate of UK corporation tax will rise to 25% from 1 April 2023. The deferred tax liabilities on 31 
March 2022 have been calculated based on this revised 25% rate. This change was not substantively enacted at 
the March 2021 balance sheet date and the deferred tax comparatives were calculated at the existing 19% rate. 

93 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

7. 

TAX EXPENSE (continued) 

R&D tax credits 

The Group recognised a credit of £10k (2021: £10k) within operating profit in relation to claims made under the 
Research  and  Development  expenditure  credit  scheme  (RDEC).  There  were  also  claims  made  under  the  SME 
scheme which are recognised within the tax expense. 

8. 

EARNINGS PER SHARE 

The earnings per share is based on the following: 

Adjusted earnings post tax 
Reported earnings post tax 

Weighted average number of shares 
Diluted number of shares 

Reported EPS 
Basic EPS from profit for the year 

Diluted EPS from profit for the year 

Adjusted EPS 
Adjusted Basic EPS from profit for the year 

Adjusted Diluted EPS from profit for the year 

2022 
£’000 

6,158 
2,523 

2021 
£’000 

4,733 
3,953 

8,551,455 
8,728,268 

8,524,883 
8,650,237 

29.5p 

28.9p 

72.0p 

70.6p 

46.4p 

45.7p 

55.5p 

54.7p 

Earnings per ordinary share has been calculated using the  weighted average number of shares in issue during 
the year. The weighted average number of equity shares in issue was  8,551,455 (2021: 8,524,883) net of the 
treasury shares disclosed in note 27. 

The  diluted  earnings  per  share  is  based  on  8,728,268  (2021:  8,650,237)  ordinary  shares  which  allow  for  the 
exercise of all dilutive potential ordinary shares. 

The adjustments to profit made in calculating the adjusted earnings are set out in note 31. 

9. 

DIVIDENDS 

Prior year final dividend paid of 10.75p per share (2021: 7.25p) 
Current year interim dividend paid of 6.25p per share (2021: 5.25p) 
Cancelled dividends on shares held in treasury 

Final dividend proposed for the year 13.25p per share (2021: 10.75p) 

2022 
£’000 

920 
535 
(2) 
_______ 

1,453 
_______ 

1,134 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

620 
450 
(1) 
_______ 

1,069 
_______ 

919 
_______ 

The proposed final dividend has not been accrued for as the dividend will be approved by the shareholders at 
the annual general meeting. 

94 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022  

10. 

PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 

Year ended 31 March 2022 

Cost 
1 April 2021 
Additions 
Disposals 
Foreign Exchange 

31 March 2022 

Depreciation and impairment 
1 April 2021 
Charge for the year 
On disposals 
Foreign Exchange 

31 March 2022 

Net book value 
31 March 2022 

Year ended 31 March 2021 

Cost 
1 April 2020 
Acquisitions  
Additions 
Disposals 
Foreign Exchange 

31 March 2021 

Depreciation and impairment 
1 April 2020 
Charge for the year 
On disposals 
Foreign Exchange 

31 March 2021 

Net book value 
31 March 2021 

Land and 
Buildings 
£’000 

446 
- 
- 
20 
_______ 
466 
_______ 

- 
- 
- 
- 
_______ 
- 
_______ 

466 
_______ 

Land and 
Buildings 
£’000 

- 
446 
- 
- 
- 
_______ 
446 
_______ 

- 
- 
- 
- 
_______ 
- 
_______ 

446 
_______ 

Short 
leasehold 
property 
improvements 
£’000 

1,951 
121 
(98) 
2 
_______ 
1,976 
_______ 

896 
189 
(98) 
- 
_______ 
987 
_______ 

989 
_______ 

Short 
leasehold 
property 
improvements 
£’000 

1,518 
31 
402 
- 
- 
_______ 
1,951 
_______ 

727 
169 
- 
- 
_______ 
896 
_______ 

1,055 
_______ 

Fittings, 
equipment 
and 
computers 
£’000 

3,570 
755 
(158) 
2 
_______ 
4,169 
_______ 

2,397 
437 
(160) 
1 
_______ 
2,675 
_______ 

1,494 
_______ 

Fittings, 
equipment 
and 
computers 
£’000 

3,142 
126 
303 
- 
(1) 
_______ 
3,570 
_______ 

2,054 
345 
- 
(2) 
_______ 
2,397 
_______ 

1,173 
_______ 

Motor  
vehicles 
£’000 

678 
302 
(207) 
- 
_______ 
773 
_______ 

371 
103 
(166) 
- 
_______ 
308 
_______ 

465 
_______ 

Motor  
vehicles 
£’000 

847 
- 
51 
(220) 
- 
_______ 
678 
_______ 

440 
100 
(169) 
- 
_______ 
371 
_______ 

307 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

6,645 
1,178 
(463) 
24 
_______ 
7,384 
_______ 

3,664 
729 
(424) 
1 
_______ 
3,970 
_______ 

3,414 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

5,507 
603 
756 
(220) 
(1) 
_______ 
6,645 
_______ 

3,221 
614 
(169) 
(2) 
_______ 
3,664 
_______ 

2,981 
_______ 

There are capital commitments of £303k (2021: £371k) at the balance sheet date. 

95 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

11. 

RIGHT OF USE ASSETS 

Year ended 31 March 2022 

Cost 
1 April 2021 
Additions 
Disposals 

31 March 2022 

Depreciation 
1 April 2021 
Charge for the year 
Disposals 

31 March 2022 

Net book value 
31 March 2022 

Land and 
 buildings 
£’000 

Motor vehicles/ 
other 
 £’000 

3,604 
285 
(69) 
_______ 
3,820 
_______ 

1,263 
701 
(27) 
_______ 
1,937 
_______ 

1,883 
_______ 

188 
28 
(3) 
_______ 
213 
_______ 

53 
62 
(2) 
_______ 
113 
_______ 

100 
_______ 

Year ended 31 March 2021 

Land and 
 buildings 
£’000 

Motor vehicles/ 
other 
 £’000 

Cost 
1 April 2020 
Additions 
Acquisition additions  
Disposals 

31 March 2021 

Depreciation 
1 April 2020 
Charge for the year 
Disposals 

31 March 2021 

Net book value 
31 March 2021 

1,894 
1,124 
726 
(140) 
_______ 
3,604 
_______ 

944 
459 
(140) 
_______ 
1,263 
_______ 

2,341 
_______ 

120 
72 
- 
(4) 
_______ 
188 
_______ 

15 
38 
- 
_______ 
53 
_______ 

135 
_______ 

The total depreciation expense of £763k (2021: £497k) has been charged to operating expenses.  

96 

Total 
£’000 

3,792 
313 
(72) 
_______ 
4,033 
_______ 

1,316 
763 
(29) 
_______ 
2,050 
_______ 

1,983 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

2,014 
1,196 
726 
(144) 
_______ 
3,792 
_______ 

959 
497 
(140) 
_______ 
1,316 
_______ 

2,476 
_______ 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

12. 

INTANGIBLE ASSETS 

Year ended 31 March 2022 

Cost 
1 April 2021 
Additions 
Acquisitions (note 31) 

31 March 2022 

Amortisation 
1 April 2021 
Charge for the year 

31 March 2022 

Net book value 
31 March 2022 

Development 
Costs 
£’000 

Computer 
Software 
£’000 

Goodwill on 
Consolidation 
£’000 

Acquisition 
Intangible 
Assets 
£’000 

1,433 
350 
- 
_______ 
1,783 
_______ 

1,333 
250 
_______ 
1,583 
_______ 

200 
_______ 

473 
251 
- 
_______ 
724 
_______ 

350 
49 
_______ 
399 
_______ 

325 
_______ 

9,898 
- 
- 
_______ 
9,898 
_______ 

- 
- 
_______ 
- 
_______ 

9,898 
_______ 

8,781 
- 
- 
_______ 
8,781 
_______ 

2,345 
1,028 
_______ 
3,373 
_______ 

5,408 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

20,585 
601 
- 
_______ 
21,186 
_______ 

4,028 
1,327 
_______ 
5,355 
_______ 

15,831 
_______ 

The cost of acquisition intangible assets comprises the estimated net present value of customer relationships 
identified on acquisitions.  The development costs relate to the cost of developing new products and technology 
to enable the company to extend its operations into new growth areas. Any assets developed that are no longer 
deemed to meet the recognition criteria of development costs have been written down. 

Year ended 31 March 2022 - Acquisition intangible assets 

Systems Division commercial relationships 
Components Division commercial relationships 

Total 

Cost 
£’000 

2,075 
6,706 
_______ 

8,781 
_______ 

Net book 
value 
£’000 
1,205 
4,203 
_______ 

5,408 
_______ 

A decision was taken to accelerate the amortisation of intangible assets related to the 2013 acquisition of ‘2001’ 
commercial relationships within the Components division from 10 years to 7 years based on a reassessment of 
the UEL of that asset in the year ended 31 March 2021. This was an additional charge of £264k to comprehensive 
income in 2021 and took the net book value to nil. 

97 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

12. 

INTANGIBLE ASSETS (continued) 

Year ended 31 March 2021 

Development 
Costs 
£’000 

Computer 
Software 
£’000 

Goodwill on 
Consolidation 
£’000 

Acquisition 
Intangible 
Assets 
£’000 

Cost 
1 April 2020 
Additions 
Acquisitions 

31 March 2021 

Amortisation 
1 April 2020 
Charge for the year 

31 March 2021 

Net book value 
31 March 2021 

1,183 
250 
- 
_______ 
1,433 
_______ 

1,083 
250 
_______ 
1,333 
_______ 

100 
_______ 

402 
52 
19 
_______ 
473 
_______ 

302 
48 
_______ 
350 
_______ 

123 
_______ 

6,300 
- 
3,598 
_______ 
9,898 
_______ 

- 
- 
_______ 
- 
_______ 

9,898 
_______ 

3,378 
- 
5,403 
_______ 
8,781 
_______ 

1,665 
680 
_______ 
2,345 
_______ 

6,436 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

11,263 
302 
9,020 
_______ 
20,585 
_______ 

3,050 
978 
_______ 
4,028 
_______ 

16,557 
_______ 

The cost of acquisition intangible assets comprises the estimated net present value of customer relationships 
identified on acquisitions. The development costs relate to the cost of developing new products and technology 
to enable the company to extend its operations into new growth areas. Any assets developed that are no longer 
deemed to meet the recognition criteria of development costs have been written down. 

Year ended 31 March 2021 - Acquisition intangible assets 

Systems Division commercial relationships 
Components division commercial relationships 

Total 

Cost 
£’000 

2,075 
6,706 
_______ 

8,781 
_______ 

Net book 
value 
£’000 
1,426 
5,010 
_______ 

6,436 
_______ 

98 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

13.  GOODWILL AND IMPAIRMENT 

Details of the carrying amount of goodwill allocated to cash generating units (CGUs) are as follows: 

 Goodwill carrying amount 

Systems Division 
Components division 

Total 

2022 
£’000 

3,946 
5,952 
_______ 

9,898 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

3,946 
5,952 
_______ 

9,898 
_______ 

The  recoverable  amounts  of  all  the  above  CGUs  have  been  determined  from  a  review  of  the  current  and 
anticipated performance of these units. In preparing the projection, a pre tax discount rate of 10% (2021: 10%) 
has been used based on the Group’s estimated weighted average cost of capital.   

A future growth  and terminal growth  rate of 2.5% (2021:  2.5%) has been assumed beyond the first  year, for 
which the projection is based on the budget approved by the Board of Directors. It has been assumed investment 
in capital equipment will equate to depreciation over this period.  

The recoverable amount exceeds the carrying amount for the Group by £94,447k (2021: £64,382k).  

The headroom within the Systems Division is significant at £53,765k (2021: £43,250k), with the more sensitive 
CGU the Components division with headroom of £47,318k (2021: £25,636k). If the following changes were made 
to the above key assumptions in respect of each division, the carrying amount would still exceed the recoverable 
amount for both divisions. 

Discount rate: Increase from 10% to 20% 
Growth rate: Reduction from 2.5% to nil% 

14. 

SUBSIDIARIES 

The subsidiaries of Solid State PLC included in these consolidated financial statements are as follows: 

Subsidiary undertakings 

Nature of business 

Proportion of 
voting rights and 
Ordinary share 
capital held 

Solid State Supplies Limited 
Steatite Limited 

Pacer Technologies Limited 
Pacer Components Limited* 
Pacer LLC* 
Willow Technologies Limited 
American Electronic Components, Inc.* 
Active Silicon Limited 
Active Silicon, Inc.* 
Solid State Supplies Electronics Limited 
Custom Power Limited 
Creasefield Limited 
Q-Par Angus Limited 
Ginsbury Electronics Limited 
Wordsworth Technology Kent Limited 

Creasefield Crewkerne Limited 

UK 
UK 

UK 
UK 
USA 
UK 
USA 
UK 
USA 
Ireland 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 

UK 

*Indirect holdings. All other holdings are direct.  

100% 
100% 

100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 

100% 

Supply of electronic components. 
Supply of electronic components and 
manufacture of electronic equipment. 
Non trading entity 
Supply of opto-electronic components. 
Supply of opto-electronic components. 
Supply of opto-electronic components. 
Supply of opto-electronic components. 
Digital image design and manufacturing. 
Manufacturing sales facility 
Sales office 
Non trading entity 
Non trading entity 
Non trading entity 
Non trading entity 
Non trading entity 

Non trading entity 

The non-trading entities are exempt from filing audited accounts with the registrar under section 479a of the 
Companies Act 2006. 

99 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

14. 

SUBSIDIARIES (continued) 

Aside from the operations in the USA and Ireland identified above, the country of operation and of incorporation 
is England and Wales, with the same registered office as Solid State PLC. The registered offices for operations in 
the US and Ireland are listed below. 

Subsidiary undertaking 

Registered Office 

Pacer USA LLC 
American Electronic Components, Inc. 
Active Silicon, Inc. 
Solid State Supplies Electronics Limited  3rd Floor Ulysses House, 23/24 Foley Street, Dublin 1, Dublin D01 W2T2, Ireland 

661 Maplewood Drive, Suite 10, Jupiter, FL 33458, USA 
1101 Lafayette Street, Elkhart, Indiana, 46516, USA 
479 Jumpers Hole Road, Suite 301, Severna Park, MD 21146, USA  

As set out in the audit committee report, the UK trading subsidiaries are exempt from the requirements to have 
an audit and file audited financial statements by virtue of section 479A of the Companies Act 2006. In adopting 
the  exemption  Solid  State  PLC  has  provided  a  statutory  guarantee  to  these  subsidiaries  in  accordance  with 
section 479C of the Companies Act 2006. 

Subsequent to year end, eTech Developments Limited was incorporated  in the UK with Solid State Plc owning 
75% of the ordinary shares and voting rights in the Company.  

15. 

INVENTORIES 

Finished goods and goods for resale 
Work in progress 

Total inventories 

2022 
£’000 

15,333 
2,265 
_______ 

17,598 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

9,056 
1,573 
_______ 

10,629 
_______ 

The  Directors  are  of  the  opinion  that  the  replacement  value  of  inventories  is  not  materially  different  to  the 
carrying value stated above. These carrying values are stated net of provisions of £3,694k (2021: £3,271k).  

An impairment loss of £610k (2021: £418k loss) was recognised in cost of sales during the year against inventory 
due to slow moving and obsolete items. 

Inventory recognised in cost of sales during the year as an expense was £57,812k (2021: £43,061k).    

16. 

TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES 

Trade receivables 
Other receivables 
Prepayments 

2022 
£’000 

14,948 
126 
2,904 
_______ 

17,978 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

11,683 
157 
2,382 
_______ 

14,222 
_______ 

An impairment credit against trade receivables of £13k (2021: Loss of £608k) was recognised within operating 
costs during the year. 

100 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022  

17. 

TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES (CURRENT) 

Trade payables 
Other taxes and social security taxes 
Other payables 
Accruals 
Deferred consideration on acquisitions 

18. 

CONTRACT LIABILITIES  

Contract liabilities 

2022 
£’000 

8,083 
2,607 
89 
5,709 
4,625 
_______ 

21,113 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

4,192 
1,301 
88 
3,737 
2,572 
_______ 

11,890 
_______ 

2022 
£’000 

2021 
£’000 

3,461 
_______ 

2,299 
_______ 

The contract  liabilities identified above relate to unsatisfied performance obligations resulting from  proforma 
and  advanced  customer  payments  where  we  have  not  recognised  the  revenue  and  provisions  for  product 
returned for rework. All these contract liabilities are expected to be recognised in the subsequent financial year. 

Revenue  recognised  within  the  year  includes  £1,980k  (2021:  £2,161k)  which  was  included  within  contract 
liabilities in the prior year. 

19. 

BANK BORROWINGS AND FACILITIES 

Current borrowings 
Bank borrowings – overdraft facility 

Non-current borrowings 
Bank borrowings 

Total borrowings 

Within one year 
Between one and two years 
Between two and five years 

Total borrowings 

101 

2022 
£’000 

2,059 

2021 
£’000 

- 

1,500 
_______ 

3,750 
_______ 

3,559 
_______ 

3,750 
_______ 

2022 
£’000 

2021 
£’000 

2,059 
1,500 
- 
_______ 

- 
3,750 
- 
_______ 

3,559 
_______ 

3,750 
_______ 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022  

19. 

BANK BORROWINGS AND FACILITIES (continued) 

The bank facilities are secured by a fixed and floating charge over the assets of the Company and the Group. At 
the balance sheet date, the Group had the following facilities: 

•  Revolving  credit  facility  of  £7.5m  (2021:  £7.5m)  of  which  £1.50m  (2021:  £3.75m)  was  drawn  at  the 
balance sheet date. This facility was committed until November 2022 and was renewed in March 2022 
to a November 2023 commitment date.   
In addition, the Group has a multi-currency overdraft facility of £3.0m (2021: £1.0m) which was utilised 
for USD of £2.1m at year end (2021: Nil).  

• 

The  multi-currency  overdraft  facility  is  in  place  to  provide  flexibility  in  financing  short-term  multi-currency 
working capital requirements. This facility is available to utilise as long as the overall balance netted across all 
accounts in the bank nets to an overall position of £Nil or higher. 

The  Group’s  banking  facilities  are  subject  to  three  financial  covenants,  being:  leverage;  debt  service;  and  a 
tangible net worth covenant. These covenants were met at all measurement points throughout the period. 

20. 

RIGHT OF USE LEASE LIABILITIES  

Current right of use lease liabilities 
Non-current right of use lease liabilities 

Total right of use lease liabilities 

Within one year 
Between one and two years 
Between two and five years 

Total right of use lease liabilities 

2022 
£’000 

758 
1,326 
_______ 

2,084 
_______ 

2022 
£’000 

758 
650 
676 
_______ 

2,084 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

741 
1,802 
_______ 

2,543 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

741 
654 
1,148 
_______ 

2,543 
_______ 

102 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022  

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS  

The Group’s overall risk management programme seeks to minimise potential adverse effects on the Group’s 
financial performance. 

The Group’s financial instruments comprise cash and cash equivalents and various items such as trade payables 
and receivables that arise directly from its operations. The carrying value of all financial instruments equal their 
fair values. The Group is exposed through its operations to the following risks: 

• 
• 
• 
• 

Credit risk 
Foreign currency risk 
Liquidity risk 
Cash flow interest rate risk 

In common with all other businesses, the Group is exposed to risks that arise from its use of financial instruments.  
This note describes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing those risks.  Further quantitative 
information in respect of these risks is presented throughout these financial statements. 

There have been no substantive changes in the Group’s exposure to financial instrument risks and consequently 
the objectives, policies and processes are unchanged from the previous period. 

The  Board  has  overall  responsibility  for  the  determination  of  the  Group’s  risk  management  policies.    The 
objective of the Board is to set policies that seek to reduce the risk as far as possible without unduly affecting 
the Group’s competitiveness and effectiveness.  Further details of these policies are set out below. 

Credit risk 
The Group is exposed to credit risk primarily on its trade receivables, which are spread over a range of customers 
and countries, a factor that helps to dilute the concentration of the risk. 

It is Group policy, implemented locally, to assess the credit risk of each new customer before  entering binding 
contracts.  Each customer account is then reviewed on an ongoing basis (at least once a year) based on available 
information and payment history. 

The maximum exposure to credit risk is represented by the carrying value of receivables as shown in note 16 and 
in the statement of financial position.  The amount of the exposure shown in note 16 is stated net of provisions 
for doubtful debts. 

The  credit  risk  on  liquid  funds  is  low  as  the  funds  are  held  at  a  bank  with  a  high  credit  rating  assigned  by 
international credit rating agencies. 

Foreign currency risk 

Foreign exchange transaction risk arises when individual Group operations enter into transactions denominated 
in a currency other than their functional currency.  The general policy for the Group is to sell to customers in the 
same currency that goods are purchased in, reducing the transactional risk.  Where transactions are not matched, 
excess foreign  currency amounts generated from trading are converted back to sterling and required foreign 
currency amounts are converted from sterling. Forward currency contracts are not used speculatively and are 
considered where the Group has a demand for foreign currency that it can reliably forecast. The Group overdraft 
facility is available on an individual currency basis as well as an overall basis. 

Liquidity risk 

The Group operates a Group overdraft facility common to all its trading companies (with the exception of the 
2021 acquisitions). This facility has a right of offset, so individual accounts in an overdraft position can be netted 
from cash held in other accounts in the same bank to a maximum position of £Nil in total.  

The Group has approximately a three month visibility in its trading and runs a rolling 6 month cash flow forecast.  
If any part of the Group identifies a shortfall in its future cash position the Group has sufficient facilities that it 
can direct funds to the location where they are required.  If this situation is forecast to continue remedial action 
is taken. 

103 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022  

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

Cash flow interest rate risk 

External  Group  borrowings  are  approved  centrally.  The  Board  accepts  that  this  neither  protects  the  Group 
entirely from the risk of paying rates in excess of current  market rates nor eliminates fully the cash flow risk 
associated with interest payments.  It considers, however, that by ensuring approval of borrowings is made by 
the Board the risk of borrowing at excessive interest rates is reduced.  The Board considers that the rates being 
paid are in line with the most competitive rates it is possible for the Group to achieve. 

Credit risk 

The carrying amount of financial assets represents the maximum credit exposure. The Group maintains its cash 
reserves at a reputable bank.  The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date was: 

Loans and Receivables 

Current financial assets 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 

2022 
£’000 

2021 
£’000 

15,074 
2,924 
_______ 

17,998 
_______ 

11,840 
6,914 
_______ 

18,754 
_______ 

The maximum exposure to credit risk for trade receivables at the reporting date by geographic region was: 

Carrying value 

UK 
Non UK 

2022 
£’000 

8,471 
6,477 
_______ 
14,948 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

7,700 
3,983 
_______ 
11,683 
_______ 

The  Group  policy  is  to  make  a  provision  against  those  debts  that  are  overdue,  unless  there  are  grounds  for 
believing that all or some of the debts will be collected.  During the year, the value of provisions made in respect 
of bad and doubtful debts was a charge of £193k (2021: £618k) which represented 0.1% (2021: 1.0%) of revenue. 
This provision is included within the sales, general and administration expenses in the Consolidated Statement 
of Comprehensive Income. 

104 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

Trade receivables ageing by geographical segment 

Geographical area 

Total 
£’000 

Current 
£’000 

2022 
UK 
Non UK 

Total 

UK 
Non UK 

Total provisions 

Total 

IFRS 9  
UK expected loss rate 
Non UK expected loss rate 

8,860 
6,737 
_______ 
15,597 

(389) 
(260) 
_______ 
(649) 
_______ 
14,948 
_______ 

4.4% 
3.9% 
_______ 

8,273 
6,122 
_______ 
14,395 

(322) 
(136) 
_______ 
(458) 
_______ 
13,937 
_______ 

3.9% 
2.2% 
_______ 

Geographical area 

Total 
£’000 

Current 
£’000 

2021 
UK 
Non UK 

Total 

UK 
Non UK 

Total provisions 

Total 

IFRS 9  
UK expected loss rate 
Non UK expected loss rate 

8,175 
4,168 
_______ 
12,343 

(496) 
(164) 
_______ 
(660) 
_______ 
11,683 
_______ 

6.1% 
3.9% 
_______ 

8,008 
3,907 
_______ 
11,915 

(401) 
(100) 
_______ 
(501) 
_______ 
11,414 
_______ 

5.0% 
2.6% 
_______ 

105 

30 days 
past due 
£’000 

418 
412 
_______ 
830 

(21) 
(24) 
_______ 
(45) 
_______ 
785 
_______ 

5.0% 
5.8% 
_______ 

30 days 
past due 
£’000 

112 
216 
_______ 
328 

(50) 
(22) 
_______ 
(72) 
_______ 
256 
_______ 

44.6% 
10.2% 
_______ 

60 days 
past due 
£’000 

128 
116 
_______ 
244 

(11) 
(23) 
_______ 
(34) 
_______ 
210 
_______ 

8.6% 
19.8% 
_______ 

60 days 
past due 
£’000 

15 
5 
_______ 
20 

(10) 
(2) 
_______ 
(12) 
_______ 
8 
_______ 

66.7% 
40.0% 
_______ 

90 days 
past due 
£’000 

41 
87 
_______ 
128 

(35) 
(77) 
_______ 
(112) 
_______ 
16 
_______ 

85.4% 
88.5% 
_______ 

90 days 
past due 
£’000 

40 
40 
_______ 
80 

(35) 
(40) 
_______ 
(75) 
_______ 
5 
_______ 

87.5% 
100.0% 
_______ 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

The Group records provision for impairment losses on its trade receivables separately from gross receivables. 
The movements on this allowance account during the year are summarised below: 

Opening balance 
Acquisition of subsidiaries 
(Decrease)/ Increase in provisions 
Written off against provisions 
Foreign exchange 

Closing balance 

2022 
£’000 

658 
- 
(14) 
4 
1 
_______ 

649 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

496 
19 
618 
(474) 
(1) 
_______ 

658 
_______ 

The main factor used in assessing the expected impairment losses of trade receivables is the age of the balances 
and the circumstances of the individual customer. 

As shown in the earlier table, at 31 March 2022 trade receivables of £1,011k which were past their due date were 
not impaired (2021: £269k).  

Liquidity risk 

The following are maturities of financial liabilities, including estimated contracted interest payments. 

Carrying  
Amount 

Contractual 
cash flow 

12 months 
or less 

1 – 2 
Years 

2 – 5 
Years 

5+ 
Years 

2022 
Trade and other payables 
Borrowings 
Right of use lease liabilities 
Provisions 
Deferred consideration on 
acquisition 

2021 
Trade and other payables 
Borrowings 
Right of use lease liabilities 
Provisions 
Deferred consideration on 
acquisition 

16,488 
3,559 
2,084 
694 
6,601 

16,488 
3,559 
2,215 
694 
6,601 

16,488 
2,059 
781 
- 
4,625 

- 
1,500 
690 
150 
1,976 

- 
- 
744 
544 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

29,426 
_______ 

29,557 
_______ 

23,953 
_______ 

4,316 
_______ 

1,288 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

9,318 
3,750 
2,543 
741 
7,522 

9,318 
3,750 
2,736 
741 
7,522 

9,318 
- 
763 
71 
2,572 

- 
3,750 
694 
20 
4,250 

- 
- 
1,279 
650 
700 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

23,874 
_______ 

24,067 
_______ 

12,724 
_______ 

8,714 
_______ 

2,629 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

106 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

Movement in deferred 
consideration on acquisitions 

2022 
£’000 

2021 
£’000 

2022 
£’000 

2021 
£’000 

2022 
£’000 

2021 
£’000 

Opening balance 
Increase/recognition 
Settlement  

Closing balance 

Foreign currency risk 

Willow 

Active 

Total 

5,089 
- 
(1,589) 
_______ 
3,500 
_______ 

- 
5,089 
- 
_______ 
5,089 
_______ 

2,433 
1,651 
(983) 
_______ 
3,101 
_______ 

- 
2,433 
- 
_______ 
2,433 
_______ 

7,522 
1,651 
(2,572) 
_______ 
6,601 
_______ 

- 
7,522 
- 
_______ 
7,522 
_______ 

The Group’s main foreign currency risk is the short-term risk associated with accounts receivable and payable 
denominated in currencies that are not the subsidiaries’ functional currency.  The risk arises on the difference in 
the exchange rate between the time invoices are raised/received and the time invoices  are settled/paid.  For 
sales  denominated  in  foreign  currencies  the  Group  will  try,  as  far  as  practical,  to  ensure  that  the  purchases 
associated with the sale will be in the same currency. As a result of advanced purchasing of components, there 
is a timing difference on USD, where the Group overdraft has been utilised as required.  

All monetary assets and liabilities of the Group were denominated in sterling  except  for the following items, 
which  are included in the financial statements at the  sterling value based on the exchange rate ruling at the 
statement of financial position date. 

The following tables show the Group net assets/(liabilities) exposed to US dollar and Euro exchange rate risk:: 

USD 

Trade receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade payables  

EUR 

Trade receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade payables  

2022 
£’000 

8,786 
(1,308) 
(4,005) 
_______ 

3,473 
_______ 
2022 
£’000 

287 
272 
(175) 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

5,727 
3,121 
(930) 
_______ 

7,918 
_______ 
2021 
£’000 

337 
942 
(115) 
_______ 

1,164 
_______ 
The Group is exposed to currency risk because it undertakes trading transactions in US dollars and  Euros (and 
immaterial transactions in other currencies).  The Directors do not generally consider it necessary to enter into 
derivative financial instruments to manage the exchange risk arising from its operations, but from time to time 
when the Directors consider foreign  currencies are weak and it is known that there will be a  requirement  to 
purchase those currencies, forward arrangements are entered into. There were no forward purchase agreements 
in place at 31 March 2022 (2021: £nil) with £nil net exposure (2021: £nil). 

384 
_______ 

The effect of a strengthening of 10% in the rate of exchange in the currencies against sterling at the statement 
of financial position date would have resulted in an estimated net increase in pre-tax profit for the year and an 
increase in net assets of approximately £428k (2021: £1,009k) and the effect of a weakening of 10% in the rate 
of exchange in the currencies against sterling at the statement of financial position date would have resulted in 
an estimated net decrease in pre-tax profit for the year and a decrease in net assets of  approximately £351k 
(2021: £826k). 

107 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022  

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

Interest rate risk 

The Group finances its business through a Revolving credit facility.  During the year the Group utilised this facility 
at a floating rate of interest.  

The Group’s banking facilities with Lloyds Bank Plc incurs interest at the rate of 2.55% over LIBOR.  The Group is 
affected by changes in the UK interest rate. As the loans are all based on variable interest rates the fair value of 
the Group’s borrowings is not materially different to the book value. 

In terms of sensitivity, if the ruling base rate had been 1% higher throughout the year the level of interest payable 
would have been £82k (2021: £41k) higher and if 1% lower throughout the year the level of interest payable 
would have been lower by the same amount. 

Capital risk management 

The Group defines total capital as equity in the consolidated statement of financial position plus net debt or less 
net funds plus deferred consideration. Total capital at 31 March 2022 was £32,251k (2021: £29,860k). 

The Group defines net (cash)/leverage as net (cash)/debt plus deferred consideration which totals £5,177k (2021: 
£4,358k). In calculating net (cash)/debt the Group has excluded the right of use lease liabilities of £2,084k (2021: 
£2,543k) from its definition and calculation. 

In managing its capital, the Group’s main objectives when managing capital are to safeguard the Group’s ability 
to continue as a going concern to provide returns for shareholders and benefits for other stakeholders and to 
maintain an optimal capital structure to reduce the cost of capital. 

Consistent  with  others  in  the  industry,  the  Group  monitors  capital  based  on  the  gearing  ratio.  This  ratio  is 
calculated as leverage divided by total capital. At 31 March 2022 the gearing ratio was 16.0% (2021: 14.6%). 

The Group seeks to maintain a gearing ratio that balances risks and returns at an acceptable level and also to 
maintain sufficient funding to enable the Group to meet its working capital and strategic investment need in the 
light of changes in economic conditions and the characteristic of the underlying assets.  

In making decisions to adjust its capital structure to achieve these aims the Group considers not only its short-
term  position  but  also  its  long  term  operational  and  strategic  objectives  and  sets  the  amount  of  capital  in 
proportion to risk.  

The Group’s gearing ratio at 31 March 2022 is shown below: 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Borrowings / bank overdrafts 
Deferred Consideration 

Net (cash)/leverage 

Share capital 
Share premium account 
Retained earnings 
Capital redemption reserve 
Foreign exchange reserve 
Shares held in treasury 

Equity 

Gearing ratio (net leverage / (equity + net leverage)/cash)) 

108 

2022 
£’000 
(4,983) 
3,559 
6,601 
_______ 

5,177 
_______ 

428 
3,625 
23,042 
5 
33 
(57) 
_______ 

27,076 
_______ 

16.0% 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 
(6,914) 
3,750 
7,522 
_______ 

4,358 
_______ 

428 
3,625 
21,508 
5 
6 
(70) 
_______ 

25,502 
_______ 

14.6% 
_______ 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

22. 

NET DEBT 

Year ended 31 March 2022 (£’000) 

Bank borrowing due within one year 
Bank borrowing due after one year 

Total borrowings 
Deferred consideration on acquisition of 
subsidiaries within one year 
Deferred consideration on acquisition of 
subsidiaries after one year 
Cash and cash equivalents  

(Net debt) / net cash 

At 1 April 
2021 

- 
(3,750) 
_______ 
(3,750) 
(2,572) 

(4,950) 

6,914 
_______ 

(4,358) 
_______ 

(Decrease)/ increase in cash in the year 
Decrease/ (Increase) in borrowings in the year 
Repayment of borrowings in the year 
Payment of deferred consideration on acquisitions 

Net movement resulting from cashflows 

(Net debt) / Net cash at 1 April 

Net movement resulting from cashflows 
Contingent consideration recognised in year – short term (note 17) 
Contingent consideration recognised in year – long term  
Other non-cash movements 

Net debt at 31 March 

Other non-
cash 
movement 

At 31 March 
2022 

- 
- 
_______ 
- 
(4,625) 

- 
(1,500) 
_______ 
(1,500) 
(4,625) 

Cash flow 

- 
2,250 
_______ 
2,250 
2,572 

- 

2,974 

(1,976) 

(4,006) 
_______ 

816 
_______ 

16 
_______ 

(1,635) 
_______ 

2022 
£’000 
(4,006) 
- 
2,250 
2,572 
_______ 

816 
_______ 

2022 
£’000 
(4,358) 

816 
- 
(1,651) 
16 
_______ 

(5,177) 
_______ 

2,924 
_______ 

(5,177) 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 
3,439 
(3,750) 
333 
- 
_______ 

22 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 
3,184 

22 
(2,572) 
(4,950) 
(42) 
_______ 

(4,358) 
_______ 

Although  the  Group’s  banking  facilities  allow  a  right  of  offset  between  cash  balances  held  at  the  bank  with 
overdraft balances at the same bank, the overdraft balances have been presented as gross on the Statement of 
Financial Position rather than net in accordance with the Interpretations Committee March 2016 Agenda decision 
on IAS 32 interpretation of cash-pooling arrangements.  

109 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

23. 

DEFERRED TAX 

The Group’s deferred tax positions arise primarily on share-based payments, accelerated capital allowances, 
capitalised development costs and intangible assets arising on acquisition of subsidiaries: 

At 1 April  
Deferred tax arising on acquisition of subsidiaries  
Credit for the year 
Effect of changes to foreign exchange rates 
Deferred tax adjustment in respect of prior periods 
Effect of tax rate change 

Net deferred tax at 31 March 

Deferred tax (liabilities)/assets in relation to: 
Accelerated capital allowances on property plant and equipment 
Short term timing differences on intangible assets 
Share based payments 
Short term timing differences 
Losses carried forward 

Net deferred tax at 31 March 

Deferred tax assets 
Deferred tax liabilities 

Net deferred tax at 31 March 

The movements in respect of deferred tax in the year were as follows: 
Accelerated 
capital 
allowances 

Share 
based 
Payments 

Short term 
timing 
differences 
on 
intangible 
assets 

2022 
£’000 

(1,303) 
- 
348 
5 
- 
(343) 
_______ 

(1,293) 
_______ 

(504) 
(1,437) 
415 
98 
135 
_______ 

(1,293) 
_______ 

539 
(1,832) 
_______ 
(1,293) 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

(421) 
(1,061) 
181 
(2) 
- 
- 
_______ 

(1,303) 
_______ 

(331) 
(1,266) 
96 
95 
103 
_______ 

(1,303) 
_______ 

188 
(1,491) 
_______ 
(1,303) 
_______ 

Short term 
timing 
differences 

Losses 
carried 
forward 

Total 

At 1 April  
Change in tax rate 
Recognised in 
statement of 
comprehensive income 
Recognised in other 
comprehensive income 

At 31 March 

(331) 
(83) 
(90) 

(1,266) 
(344) 
173 

95 
38 
21 

96 
13 
(11) 

103 
32 
- 

(1,303) 
(344) 
93 

- 

- 

261 

- 

- 

261 

_______ 
(504) 
_______ 

_______ 
(1,437) 
_______ 

_______ 
415 
_______ 

_______ 
98 
_______ 

_______ 
135 
_______ 

_______ 
(1,293) 
_______ 

110 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

23. 

DEFERRED TAX (continued)  

The UK corporation tax rate is 19% (effective from 1 April 2017) which was substantively enacted on 17 March 
2020.  The  comparative  deferred  tax  liabilities  at  31  March  2021  were  calculated  based  on  this  rate.  As 
substantively enacted on 24 May 2021, the UK corporation tax rate will increase to 25% with effect from 1 April 
2023. The impact of re-calculating the deferred tax at the 25% rate is recognised in comprehensive income. 

The amount of the net reversal of deferred tax expected to occur next year is approximately £231k (2021: £191k) 
relating to the timing differences identified above. 

The deferred tax asset of £261k (2021: £84k) in respect of the future tax deduction that would be available based 
on the share price at the balance sheet date compared to the share price at the date of grant of the options and 
share  bonus,  which  is  used  to  calculate  the  share  based  payments  charge,  was  recognised  in  the  year.  This 
deferred tax asset has been credited to other comprehensive income (“OCI”) and treated as an adjustment to 
profit. The share price post year end when the shares are exercised may be lower than at the balance sheet date, 
therefore this deferred tax asset is considered judgemental as it may not be fully recoverable.  

In addition, there is an unrecognised deferred tax asset in relation to capital losses carried forward. The capital 
losses carried forward are approximately £275k. The associated deferred tax asset of approximately £69k has 
not been recognised due to the uncertainty over the recoverability combined with the fact it is immaterial. 

The deferred tax asset has been reclassified as long-term in the current year; the comparative was retained in 
current as it was not material. 

24. 

PROVISIONS 

At 1 April  
Dilapidations acquired on acquisitions at FV  
Provisions utilised during the year 
Recognition of dilapidation asset 
(Released)/charged to statement of comprehensive income 

Provisions at 31 March 

2022 
£’000 

741 
- 
(18) 
- 
(29) 
_______ 
694 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

304 
43 
(7) 
400 
- 
_______ 
741 
_______ 

The  Group  has  provided  for property  related  provisions which  include  obligations  in  respect  of  exited  legacy 
premises and dilapidations provisions it expects to exit within the next 5 years. Based on using a risk-free discount 
rate of 2.5% the Group has assessed the impact of discounting to be immaterial and has not therefore discounted 
the provisions. 

25. 

SHARE CAPITAL 

Allotted issued and fully paid 
8,564,878 (2021: 8,564,878) ordinary shares of 5p 

2022 
£’000 

2021 
£’000 

428 
_______ 

428 
_______ 

The ordinary shares carry no right to fixed income, the holders are entitled to receive dividends as declared and 
are entitled to one vote per share at shareholder meetings. 

Details of options granted are set out in the Remuneration Committee Report on pages 46 to 58.  At 31 March 
2022 the number of shares covered by option agreements amounted to 248,100 (2021: 79,550). At the balance 
sheet  date there were  96,000 (2021: 96,000) share options which  had vested and remained unexercised. No 
options were exercised in the current year (2021: Nil). 

111 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

26. 

RESERVES 

Full details of movements in reserves are set out in the consolidated statement of changes in equity on page 71. 

The following describes the nature and purpose of each reserve within owners’ equity. 

Reserve 
Share premium 

Capital redemption 

Retained earnings 

Shares held in treasury 

Foreign exchange  

Description and Purpose 
Amount subscribed for share capital in excess of 
nominal value. 
Amounts transferred from share capital on redemption 
of issued shares. 
Cumulative net gains and losses recognised in the 
consolidated statement of comprehensive income. 
Shares held by the Group for future staff share plan 
awards. 
Foreign exchange translation differences arising from 
the translation of the financial statements of foreign 
operations . 

27. 

TREASURY SHARES 

At 31 March 2022 the Group held 6,946 (2021: 11,374) shares in treasury with a cost of £57k (2021: £70k). No 
shares have been cancelled. 

At 1 April  
Purchase of shares into treasury  
Transfer of shares to the All Employee Share Plan (AESP) 

At 31 March 

2022 
shares 

11,374 
7,000 
(11,428) 
_______ 
6,946 
_______ 

2021 
Shares 

7,374 
15,000 
(11,000) 
_______ 
11,374 
_______ 

28. 

SHARE BASED PAYMENT 

The total amount charged to the income statement in 2022 in respect of share-based payments was £295,000 
(2021: £171,000).  

The company operates two long term share incentive schemes set out below: 

Long term incentive plan (LTIP): 

Normal LTIP awards of up to 125% of salary may  be made to Executive Directors and Senior management, as 
outlined in the Policy Table of the remuneration report on page 53.   

For all participants, awards will vest after three years in accordance with the performance conditions applicable 
to each grant. Options are granted with a contractual life of ten years and with a fixed exercise price of 5p equal 
to the par value of the shares or as otherwise disclosed in the remuneration report. 

The performance conditions will be determined and set by the Remuneration Committee in accordance with the 
remuneration policy. No award will vest below Threshold performance, and vesting will increase on a straight-
line basis between threshold, target and stretch.  

112 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

28. 

SHARE BASED PAYMENT (continued) 

On the 29 October 2021 42,800 (2021: 42,800) share options were granted to the Executive Directors under the 
LTIP. 

Principal assumptions 

Weighted average share price at grant date in pence 
Weighted average exercise price in pence 
Weighted average vesting period (years) 
Option life (years) 
Weighted average expected life (years) 
Weighted average expected volatility factor 
Weighted average risk free rate 
Dividend yield 

2022 

1,085 
5 
3 
10 
3 
47% 
1.50% 
2.5% 

2021 

580 
5 
3 
10 
3 
50% 
0.75% 
2.5% 

The  expected  volatility  factor  is  based  on  historical  share  price  volatility  over  the  three  years  immediately 
preceding the grant of the option. The expected life is the average expected period to exercise. The risk-free rate 
of return is the yield of zero-coupon UK government bonds of a term consistent with the assumed option life.  

Non-market  performance  conditions  are  incorporated  into  the  calculation  of  fair  value  by  estimating  the 
proportion of share options that will vest and be exercised based on a combination of historical trends and future 
expected trading performance. These are reassessed at the end of each period for each tranche of unvested 
options. 

Company Share Option Plan (CSOP): 

CSOP  awards  of  up  to  the  HMRC  tax  approved  levels  of  £30,000  may  be  made  to  senior  staff  and  Executive 
Directors, as outlined in the Policy Table of the remuneration report on page 53. For all participants, awards will 
vest after three years in accordance with the performance conditions applicable to each grant.  

Options are granted with a contractual life of ten years and with a fixed exercise price equal to the market value 
of the shares under option at the date of grant or as otherwise disclosed in the remuneration report 

The performance conditions will be determined and set by the Remuneration Committee in accordance with the 
remuneration policy. No award will vest below Threshold performance, and vesting will increase on a straight-
line basis between threshold, target and stretch.  

On the 06 October 2021 36,750 (2021: 36,750) share options were granted to the senior management under 
CSOP.  

Principal assumptions 

Weighted average share price at grant date in pence 
Weighted average exercise price in pence 
Weighted average vesting period (years) 
Option life (years) 
Weighted average expected life (years) 
Weighted average expected volatility factor 
Weighted average risk free rate 
Dividend yield 

2022 

1,050 
1,050 
3 
10 
3 
46% 
1.50% 
2.5% 

2021 

587 
592 
3 
10 
3 
50% 
0.75% 
2.5% 

113 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

28. 

SHARE BASED PAYMENT (continued) 

Movement in share options during the year 

In addition to the current CSOP and LTIP there are bought forward executive EMI options  which have vested 
which remain unexercised at the balance sheet date. 

At 1 April  
Granted  
Exercised 
Cancelled / lapsed 

At 31 March 

2022 
Number of 
options 

2022 average 
exercise price 
in pence 

2021 
Number of 
options 

2021 average 
exercise price 
in pence 

175,550 
79,550 
- 
(7,000) 
_______ 
248,100 
_______ 

125 
488 
- 
(707) 
_______ 
225 
_______ 

112,000 
79,550 
16,000 
- 
_______ 
175,000 
_______ 

0.1 
276 
0.1 
- 
_______ 
125 
_______ 

No options were exercised in the year and  the  weighted average share price at the date share options were 
exercised in 2021 was 544p.  

As at 31 March 2022, the total number of long-term incentive awards and share options held by employees was 
248,100 (2021: 175,550) as follows: 

Option price pence/share 

0.1p 
5p – 592p 
5p – 1050p 

At 31 March 

Option period 
ending 

31 March 2027 
31 March 2030 
31 March 2031 

2022 
Number 
of options 

96,000 
74,300 
77,800 
_______ 
248,100 
_______ 

2021 Number 
of options 

96,000 
79,550 
- 
_______ 
175,550 
_______ 

No share options have vested in the period (2021: Nil).  

All Employee Share plan (AESP) 

AESP awards of up to the HMRC tax approved levels to all UK employees. These awards vest tax free from the 
AESP  after  at  least  three  years  but  not  more  than  five  years  from  the  date  of  grant  subject  to  continued 
employment. 

On the 7 March 2022 12,250 (2021: 10,900) share options were awarded to the employees under the AESP.  

The share price at the date of award was 960p (2021: 680p). As the awards are effectively £nil cost awards, the 
fair  value is determined to equal to the share price at the date of grant  under the Black Scholes model. This 
resulted  in a  share based payments charge of  £118k  (2021: £74k) as part  of the total  share based payments 
charge. 

29. 

CAPITAL COMMITMENTS 

At 31 March 2022 there were capital commitments of £303k (2021: £371k). 

114 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022  

30. 

SEGMENT INFORMATION 

The  Group’s  primary  reporting  format  for  segment  information  is  business  segments  which  reflect  the 
management  reporting structure in the  Group.  The  Components Division  comprises Solid State Supplies Ltd, 
Pacer LLC, Pacer Components Ltd, Willow Technologies Limited and American Electronic Components, Inc.. The 
Systems Division includes Steatite Ltd, Active Silicon Limited and Active Silicon Inc.. 

Year ended 31 March 2022 

External revenue 

Profit before tax 
Taxation 

Profit after taxation 

Consolidated statement of financial position 
Assets 
Liabilities 

Net assets 

Other  
Capital expenditure: 
  Tangible fixed assets  
  Tangible fixed assets - acquisitions  

Intangible assets 
Intangible assets – acquisitions  

  Right of use assets 
  Right of use assets – acquisitions 
Depreciation - PPE 
Depreciation – right of use assets 
Amortisation 
Share based payments 
Interest 

Components 
division 
£’000 
52,480 
______ 
3,627 
(903) 
______ 
2,724 

Systems 
division 
£’000 
32,517 
______ 
2,270 
(297) 
______ 
1,973 

Head  
office 
£’000 
- 
______ 
(2,397) 
223 
______ 
(2,174) 

Total  
Group 
£’000 
84,997 
______ 
3,500 
(977) 
______ 
2,523 

24,616 
(11,587) 
______ 

21,665 
(14,253) 
______ 

16,045 
(9,410) 
______ 

62,326 
(35,250) 
______ 

13,029 

7,412 

6,635 

27,076 

524 
- 
268 
- 
216 
- 
331 
264 
20 
- 
48 
______ 

654 
- 
333 
- 
97 
- 
398 
499 
279 
- 
61 
_____ 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
1,028 
295 
117 
______ 

1,178 
- 
601 
- 
313 
- 
729 
763 
1,327 
295 
226 
______ 

No individual customer contributed more than 10% of the Group’s revenue in the financial year ended 31 March 
2022 or the prior year.   

115 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

30. 

SEGMENT INFORMATION (continued) 

Year ended 31 March 2021 

External revenue 

Profit before tax 
Taxation 

Profit after taxation 

Consolidated statement of financial position 
Assets 
Liabilities 

Net assets 

Other  
Capital expenditure: 
  Tangible fixed assets  
  Tangible fixed assets - acquisitions  

Intangible assets 
Intangible assets – acquisitions  

  Right of use assets 
  Right of use assets – acquisitions 
Depreciation - PPE 
Depreciation – right of use assets 
Amortisation 
Share based payments 
Interest 

Components 
division 
£’000 

38,982 
______ 
2,011 
(337) 
______ 
1,674 

22,631 
(8,804) 
______ 
13,827 

413 
504 
45 
3 
315 
27 
379 
207 
19 
- 
35 
______ 

Systems 
division 
£’000 
27,299 
______ 
4,353 
(310) 
______ 
4,043 

14,852 
(7,680) 
______ 
7,172 

343 
99 
257 
19 
881 
699 
235 
290 
279 
- 
14 
_____ 

Head  
office 
£’000 
- 
______ 
(2,164) 
400 
______ 
(1,764) 

Total  
Group 
£’000 
66,281 
______ 
4,200 
(247) 
______ 
3,953 

16,484 
(11,981) 
______ 
4,503 

53,967 
(28,465) 
______ 
25,502 

- 
- 
- 
8,998 
- 
- 
- 
- 
680 
171 
36 
______ 

756 
603 
302 
9,020 
1,196 
726 
614 
497 
978 
171 
85 
______ 

External revenue by 
location of customer 

Total assets by 
location of assets 

Net capital 
expenditure by location 
of assets 

2022 
£’000 

2021 
£’000 

2022 
£’000 

2021 
£’000 

2022 
£’000 

2021 
£’000 

United Kingdom 
Rest of Europe 
Asia 
North America 
Other 

53,030 
15,726 
6,542 
9,175 
524 
_______ 

46,301 
7,349 
3,342 
9,148 
141 
_______ 

59,023 
1 
- 
3,302 
- 
_______ 

49,616 
1 
- 
4,151 
- 
_______ 

1,723 
- 
- 
56 
- 
_______ 

1,058 
- 
- 
- 
- 
_______ 

84,997 
_______ 

66,281 
_______ 

62,326 
_______ 

53,768 
_______ 

1,779 
_______ 

1,058 
_______ 

Capital expenditure excludes acquisitions of assets as per note 10 and 12 in 2021. 

116 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

31.   ADJUSTMENTS TO PROFIT 

The  Group’s  results  are  reported  after  several  imputed  non-cash  charges  and  non-recurring  items.  We  have 
provided  additional  adjusted performance  metrics  to  aid  understanding  and  provide  clarity  over  the  Group’s 
performance on an on-going cash basis before imputed non-cash accounting charges. This is consistent with how 
analysts  and  investors  tell  us  they  review  our  business  performance  in  presenting  an  adjusted  profit  metric 
adjusting for the following items: 

•  Non-cash charges arising from share-based payments and the amortisation of acquisition intangibles. 
•  Non-recurring  cash  costs  relating  to  the  re-organisation  of  the  Systems  Division  and  acquisition  costs 

(including fair value adjustments). 

•  Non-recurring tax credits arising primarily from prior year R&D claims and tax deductions on share options. 
•  The impact of the change in deferred tax rate from 19% to 25% on charges treated as adjustments. 
•  The recognition in OCI of a deferred tax asset relating to the future tax deduction that would be available 
based on the share price at the balance sheet date compared to the share price at the date of grant of the 
options and share bonus. 

Reported gross profit 
Adjustments to gross profit 

Adjusted gross profit 

Reported operated profit 
Adjustments to operating profit 

Adjusted operating profit 

Reported operating margin percentage 
Operating margin percentage impact of adjustments 

Adjusted operating margin percentage 

Reported profit before tax 
Adjustments to profit before tax 

Adjusted profit before tax 

Reported profit after tax 
Adjustments to profit after tax 

Adjusted profit after tax 

Reported total other comprehensive income 
Adjustments to total other comprehensive income 

Adjusted total other comprehensive income 

117 

2022 
£’000 
27,527 
168 
_______ 
27,695 
_______ 
3,726 
3,674 
_______ 
7,400 
_______ 
4.4% 
4.3% 
_______ 
8.7% 
_______ 
3,500 
3,674 
_______ 
7,174 
_______ 
2,523 
3,635 
_______ 
6,158 
_______ 
2,784 
3,374 
_______ 
6,158 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 
19,919 
73 
_______ 
19,992 
_______ 
4,285 
1,187 
_______ 
5,472 
_______ 
6.5% 
1.8% 
_______ 
8.3% 
_______ 
4,200 
1,187 
_______ 
5,387 
_______ 
3,953 
780 
_______ 
4,733 
_______ 
3,953 
780 
_______ 
4,733 
_______ 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

31.   ADJUSTMENTS TO PROFIT (CONTINUED) 

The split of the adjustments is as follows: 

Acquisition fair value adjustments within cost of sales 
Acquisition fair value adjustments, reorganisation and deal costs 
Increase in deferred consideration on acquisition of Active Silicon 
Amortisation of acquisition intangibles 
Share based payments 

Adjustment to profit before tax 
Current and deferred taxation effect 
Deferred tax rate change impact on acquisition intangibles and share 
based payments 
Non-recurring tax credits 

Adjustments to profit after tax 
Recognition of deferred tax asset in OCI re. share price impact on options 

Adjustments to total other comprehensive income 

2022 
£’000 
168 
533 
1,650 
1,028 
295 
_______ 
3,674 
(327) 
288 

- 
_______ 
3,635 
(261) 
_______ 
3,374 

2021 
£’000 
73 
263 
- 
680 
171 
_______ 
1,187 
(226) 
- 

(181) 
_______ 
780 
- 
_______ 
780 

Acquisition fair value adjustments within cost of sales relates to the unwind of the IFRS 3 fair value uplift on stock 
to selling price less cost to sell in both periods. 

Acquisition fair value adjustments, reorganisation and deal costs in the current year relate to transaction costs 
for the acquisition of Custom Power. The costs in the comparative period relate to £195k transaction costs on 
Willow and Active Silicon and £69k redundancy costs. 

32.  

POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS 

Intended Acquisition of Custom Power LLC (“Custom Power”) 

Post year end the Group announced on 12 July 2022 its intention to raise up to £28.4m of equity  to fund the 
acquisition  of  Custom  Power  for  up  to  $45m.  New  additional  term  loan  debt  facilities  of  £13m  and  $10m  of 
standby letters of credit have been agreed by Lloyds Bank PLC in support of the transaction. 

Full details of the acquisition are set out in the announcement on the 12 July 2022 and in the circular issued to 
shareholders on the 13 July 2022 ahead of the general meeting on the 29 July 2022. The announcement, circular 
and investor presentation are available on the Group’s website www.solidstateplc.com.    

Formation of eTech Developments Limited 

On  the  8  June  2022  the  Group  formed  a  new  entity,  eTech  Developments  Limited,  registered  Co.  number 
14159260.    eTech  Developments  Limited  is  75%  owned  by  Solid  State  PLC.  This  is  a  new  business  which  is 
expected  to  provide  engineering  consultancy  by  employing  a  small  engineering  team.  Once  the  team  are 
recruited, the team are expected to provide Power engineering services to the Group and external customers on 
an arm’s length basis. 

118 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
COMPANY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 
at 31 March 2022 

Company Number: 00771335 

2022 

2021 

Notes 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

FIXED ASSETS 
Investments 
Deferred tax asset 

CURRENT ASSETS 
Trade and other receivables 
Deferred tax asset 
Cash and cash equivalents 

4 

5 

CREDITORS:  Amounts falling due within one year 

6 

NET CURRENT LIABILITIES 

NON CURRENT LIABILITIES 
Non current borrowings 
Deferred consideration on acquisitions 

NET ASSETS 

CAPITAL AND RESERVES 
Called up share capital 
Share premium account 
Capital redemption reserve 
Retained earnings  
Shares held in treasury 

SHAREHOLDERS’ FUNDS 

7 
7 

8 
9 
9 
9 
10 

35,654 
415 
_______ 

1,725 
- 
276 
_______ 
2,001 

(28,255) 
_______ 

34,003 
- 
  _______ 

36,069 

34,003 

3,223 
96 
16 
_______ 
3,335 

(22,511) 
  _______ 

(26,254) 
  _______ 

(19,176) 
  _______ 

(1,500) 
(1,976) 
_______ 

(3,750) 
(4,950) 
  _______ 

(3,476) 

(8,700) 

6,339 
  _______ 

428 
3,625 
5 
2,338 
(57) 
  _______ 

6,339 
  _______ 

6,127 
  _______ 

428 
3,625 
5 
2,139 
(70) 
  _______ 

6,127 
  _______ 

The company made a profit after tax in the year of £1,189k (2021: £284k) and Other Comprehensive Income of £261k 
(2021: Nil). Total Comprehensive Income for the period was £1,450k (2021: 284k). 

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 27 July 2022. 

G S Marsh, Director   

P O James, Director   

The notes on pages 121 to 124 form part of these financial statements. 

119 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                           
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
COMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

Share 
Capital 
£’000 

Share  
Premium 
reserve 
£’000 

Capital 
Redemption 
Reserve 
£’000 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

Shares 
Held in 
Treasury 
£’000 

Share-
holders 
Funds 
£’000 

Balance at 31 March 2021 

428 

3,625 

5 

2,139 

(70) 

6,127 

Total comprehensive 
income for the year ended 
31 March 2022 

Shares issued 

Purchase of treasury 
shares 

Transfer of treasury shares 
to AESP 

Dividends 

Share based payment 
credit 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1,450 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1,450 

- 

(80) 

(80) 

(93) 

93 

- 

(1,453) 

295 

- 

- 

(1,453) 

295 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

Balance at 31 March 2022 

428 
_______ 

3,625 
_______ 

5 
_______ 

2,338 
_______ 

(57) 
_______ 

6,339 
_______ 

Share 
Capital 
£’000 

Share  
Premium 
reserve 
£’000 

Capital 
Redemption 
Reserve 
£’000 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

Shares 
Held in 
Treasury 
£’000 

Share-
holders 
Funds 
£’000 

Balance at 31 March 2020 

427 

3,626 

5 

2,821 

(43) 

6,836 

Total comprehensive 
income for the year ended 
31 March 2021 

Shares issued 

Purchase of treasury shares 

Transfer of treasury shares 
to AESP 

Dividends 

- 

1 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(1) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

284 

- 

- 

- 

- 

284 

- 

(95) 

(95) 

(68) 

68 

- 

(1,069) 

- 

(1,069) 

Share based payment credit 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

171 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

171 
_______ 

Balance at 31 March 2021 

428 
_______ 

3,625 
_______ 

5 
_______ 

2,139 
_______ 

(70) 
_______ 

6,127 
_______ 

The notes on pages 121 to 124 form part of these financial statements. 
120 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022  

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES 

The  following  accounting  policies  have  been  applied  consistently  in  dealing  with  items  which  are  considered 
material in relation to the Company’s financial statements. 

Basis of preparation 

These  financial  statements  have  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  applicable  United  Kingdom  Accounting 
standards, including Financial Reporting Standard 102 -The Financial Reporting Standard applicable in the UK and 
Republic of Ireland (“FRS 102”) and with the Companies Act 2006.  The financial statements have been prepared 
under the historical cost convention. 

The financial statements are prepared in sterling rounded to the nearest thousand pounds (£’000). 

The company has taken advantage of the exemption from disclosing the following information in its company 
only accounts, as permitted by the reduced disclosure regime within FRS 102: 

• 

Section 7 ‘Statement of Cash Flows’ – Presentation of a Statement of Cash Flow and related notes and 
disclosures 

Profit and loss account 

Under section 408(4) of the Companies Act 2006 the Company is exempt from the requirement to present its 
own profit and loss account.  The profit for the year ended 31 March 2022 and the profit for the year ended 31 
March 2021 are disclosed in the Statement of Changes in Equity. 

Going concern 

The going concern basis of accounting has been used in the preparation of these financial statements. The Solid 
State  PLC  entity  balance  sheet  reflects  £5.6m  net  current  liabilities  (excluding  group  balances)  due  to  the 
recognition  of  the  short  term  £4.6m  of  deferred  consideration.  The  deferred  consideration  can  be  settled 
through the Group’s bank  facilities which  are committed  until Nov  2023 with £6.0m undrawn at the balance 
sheet  date.  Dividends  totalling  £3.24m  were  received  from  subsidiary  companies  in  this  financial  year  and 
subsidiary companies have the reserves available to pay dividends in the next financial year. The Directors have 
not identified any material uncertainties in this regard. 

Foreign currencies 

Foreign currency transactions are translated at the rates ruling when they occurred.   Foreign currency monetary 
assets and liabilities are translated at the rate of exchange ruling at the statement of financial position date.  Any 
differences are taken to the statement of comprehensive income. 

Investments in subsidiaries 

Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less amounts provided for impairment. When the trade and assets 
of a subsidiary are consolidated / re-organised the investment is re-allocated based on the cost method where 
the commercial substance and economic reality is that the Investment carrying value remains intact. The carrying 
value of the revised investments are evaluated for impairment in accordance with FRS102. 

Other financial liabilities 

Other financial liabilities are accounted for on the same basis as in the consolidated accounts. See accounting 
policy on page 83 as there is no material difference between FRS102 and IFRS. 

Share based payment 

Share  based  payments  are  accounted  for  on  the  same  basis  as  in  the  consolidated  accounts.  See  accounting 
policy on page 87 as there is no material difference between FRS102 and IFRS. 

Treasury Shares 

Treasury shares are accounted for on the same basis as in the consolidated accounts. See accounting policy on 
page 84 as there is no material difference between FRS102 and IFRS. 

121 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

For the year ended 31 March 2022  

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND JUDGEMENTS 

The preparation of financial statements requires the use of accounting estimates which, by definition, will seldom 
equal  the  actual  results.  Management  also  needs  to  exercise  judgement  in  applying  the  Group’s  accounting 
policies. This note provides an overview of the areas that involved a higher degree of judgement or complexity, 
and of items which are more likely to be materially adjusted due to estimates and assumptions turning out to be 
wrong.  

The material judgement / estimate impacting the entity accounts are the estimate of the deferred contingent 
consideration on the acquisition of Active Silicon which is set out in the Group disclosure in Note 2. 

2. 

STAFF COSTS 

Wages and salaries 
Social security costs 
Other pension costs 
Share based payment charges 

Total staff costs 

2022 
£’000 

985 
130 
50 
295 
_______ 

1,460 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

697 
118 
40 
171 
_______ 

1,026 
_______ 

Staff costs amounted £1,460k (2021: £1,026k) and comprised the share based payment expense of £295k (2021: 
£171k) and provision for employer’s national insurance on exercise of share options of £45k (2021: £24k). 

Included within the Company Staff costs are the salary and related costs in respect of Mr G S Marsh, Mr P O 
James,  Mr  N  F  Rogers,  Mr  P Haining  and  Mr  P  Magowan. No  other  Director’s  remuneration  was paid by  the 
Company. Details of  the  Directors whose  emoluments  were  paid by other Group companies  are given in the 
Remuneration Committee Report on pages 46 to 58. 

The average monthly number of employees during the year, including the Executive Directors, was as follows: 

Management and administration 

3. 

SHARE BASED PAYMENT 

See Group share based payments disclosures in note 28 to the Group accounts. 

2022 
Number 

15 
_______ 

15 
_______ 

2021 
Number 

12 
_______ 

12 
_______ 

122 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022  

4. 

INVESTMENTS 

Subsidiary undertakings 

Cost 
1 April 
Additions 

31 March 

Net book value 
31 March 

2022 
£’000 

34,003 
1,651 
_______ 

35,654 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

13,255 
20,748 
_______ 

34,003 
_______ 

35,654 
_______ 

34,003 
_______ 

The movement in this period relates to the increase in the deferred consideration acquisition cost of the Active 
Silicon Group as disclosed in Note 2 to the Group accounts. 

Subsidiary undertakings 

Net book value of investment in: 
Steatite limited 
Solid State Supplies Limited 
Pacer Technologies Limited 
Willow Technologies Group 
Active Silicon Group 

Total investments at 31 March 

Subsidiary undertakings 

See Group subsidiary undertakings disclosures in note 14 to the Group accounts. 

5. 

DEBTORS 

Amounts owed by Group undertakings 
Other debtors 
Prepayments 

2022 
£’000 

5,307 
4,201 
3,747 
13,144 
9,255 
_______ 

35,654 
_______ 

2022 
£’000 

1,710 
1 
14 
_______ 

1,725 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

5,307 
4,201 
3,747 
13,144 
7,604 
_______ 

34,003 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

3,200 
11 
12 
_______ 

3,223 
_______ 

123 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2022 

6. 

CREDITORS – Amounts falling due within one year 

Amounts owed to Group undertakings 
Other taxes and social security costs 
Trade and other creditors 
Accruals 
Deferred consideration on acquisitions 

2022 
£’000 

22,357 
149 
28 
1,096 
4,625 
_______ 

28,255 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

19,144 
107 
86 
602 
2,572 
_______ 

22,511 
_______ 

The Company has guaranteed bank borrowings of all its subsidiary undertakings, the main trading subsidiaries 
are Solid State Supplies Limited, Steatite Limited, Pacer Components Limited, Willow Technologies Limited and 
Active Silicon Limited. At the year end the liabilities covered by those guarantees amounted to £nil (2021: £nil).  
The  Company  accounts  for  guarantees  provided  to  Group  companies  as  insurance  contracts,  recognising  a 
liability only to the extent that it is probable the guarantees will be called upon. 

The short-term deferred consideration on acquisitions is £3.5m for Willow Technologies Group and £1.1m for 
Active Silicon Group. 

All amounts owed to / from Group undertakings are payable / repayable on demand and not interest bearing. 

7. 

CREDITORS – Amounts falling due after more than one year 

Bank borrowings 
Deferred consideration on acquisitions 

2022 
£’000 

1,500 
1,976 
_______ 

3,476 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

3,750 
4,950 
_______ 

8,700 
_______ 

The long-term deferred consideration is £1.98m for Active Silicon Group as disclosed in note 2 of the consolidated 
Group accounts. See note 19 to the Group accounts for borrowings disclosures. 

8. 

SHARE CAPITAL 

See Group share capital disclosures in note 25 to the Group accounts. 

9. 

RESERVES 

See Group reserves disclosures in note 26 to the Group accounts. 

10.  OWN SHARES HELD IN TREASURY 

See Group treasury shares disclosures in note 27 to the Group accounts. 

124 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTICE OF ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING 

The annual general meeting is being held at the registered office of the company in the usual way and in accordance 
with the current Articles of Association.  

If any shareholders are intending to attend the meeting in person, we would request that they register this intention at 
least 48 hours in advance of the meeting at (investor.information@solidstateplc.com). 

Notice is hereby given that the annual general meeting of Solid State PLC will be held at 2 Ravensbank Business Park, 
Hedera Road Redditch B98 9EY, on 7 September 2022 at 9.30am for the following purposes: 

(1) 

(2) 

(3) 

(4) 

(5) 

(6) 

(7) 

(8) 

(9) 

(10) 

(11) 

(12) 

(13) 

ORDINARY RESOLUTIONS 

To receive the accounts for the year ended 31 March 2022, together with the reports of the Directors and 
auditors thereon.  (Resolution 1) 

To approve the Directors’ Annual Report on Remuneration (this is an advisory vote). (Resolution 2) 

To declare a final dividend of 13.25p per share.  (Resolution 3) 

To reappoint Mr Nigel F Rogers as a director of the company.  (Resolution 4) 

To reappoint Mr Gary S Marsh as a director of the company.  (Resolution 5) 

To reappoint Mr John L Macmichael as a director of the company.  (Resolution 6) 

To reappoint Mr Peter O James as a director of the company.  (Resolution 7) 

To reappoint Mr Matthew T Richards as a director of the company. (Resolution 8) 

To reappoint Mr Peter Haining as a director of the company.  (Resolution 9) 

To reappoint Mr Peter J Magowan as a director of the company.  (Resolution 10) 

To reappoint RSM UK Audit LLP as auditors of the Company.  (Resolution 11) 

To authorise the Directors to fix the auditors’ remuneration.  (Resolution 12) 

To pass the following resolution: 

That  the  Directors  be  generally  and  unconditionally  authorised  to  allot  shares  in  the  Company  (Relevant 
Securities): 

i) 

comprising equity securities (as defined by section 560 of the Companies Act 2006) up to an aggregate 
nominal amount of £186,704.85 (which is 33% of the issued share capital) (such amount to be reduced 
by the nominal amount of any Relevant Securities allotted under paragraph (ii) below) in connection with 
an offer by way of a rights issue: 

(a)  to  holders  of  ordinary  shares  in  proportion  (as  nearly  as  may  be  practicable)  to  their  respective 
holdings; and 

(b) to holders of other equity securities as required by the rights of those securities or as the Directors 
otherwise consider necessary, 

but subject to such exclusions or other arrangements as the Board may deem necessary or expedient in 
relation to treasury shares, fractional entitlements, record dates, legal or practical problems in or under 
the laws of any territory or the requirements of any regulatory body or stock exchange; and 

125 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTICE OF ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING (continued) 

ii) 

in any other case, up to an aggregate nominal amount of £113,154.45 (which is 20% of the issued share 
capital)  (such  amount  to  be  reduced  by  the  nominal  amount  of  any  equity  securities  allotted  under 
paragraph i) above, provided that this authority shall, unless renewed, varied or revoked by the Company, 
expire after a period of 18 months from the passing of this resolution or, if earlier, the date of the next 
annual general meeting of the Company save that the Company may, before such expiry, make offers or 
agreements which would or might require Relevant Securities to be allotted and the Directors may allot 
Relevant Securities in pursuance of such offer or agreement notwithstanding that the authority conferred 
by this resolution has expired. 

This resolution revokes and replaces all unexercised authorities previously granted to the Directors to 
allot Relevant Securities but without prejudice to any allotment of shares or grant of rights already made, 
offered or agreed to be made pursuant to such authorities.  (Resolution 13) 

SPECIAL RESOLUTIONS 

(14) 

To pass the following resolution: 

That the Company is authorised to allot equity securities pursuant to resolution 13 above up to an aggregate 
nominal amount of £56,577.20, which is 10% of the issued share capital, as if Section 561 of the Companies Act 
2006 (existing shareholders – right of pre-emption): 

i)  did not apply to the allotment; or 

ii)  applied  to  the  allotment  with  such  modifications  as  the  Directors  may  determine  provided  that  this 
authority shall, unless renewed, varied or revoked by the company, expire after a period of 18 months 
from  the  passing  of  this  resolution  save  that  the  company  may,  before  such  expiry,  make  offers  or 
agreements which  would or might require equity securities to be allotted and the Directors may allot 
equity securities in pursuance of such offer or agreement not withstanding that the authority conferred 
by the resolution has expired.  (Resolution 14) 

(15) 

To pass the following resolution: 

That the Company is, pursuant to Section 701 of the Companies Act 2006, hereby generally and unconditionally 
authorised  to  make  market  purchases  (within  the  meaning  of  Section  693  of  the  Companies  Act  2006)  of 
ordinary shares of 5p each in the capital of the Company (“ordinary shares”) provided that:- 

i)  the minimum price which may be paid for the ordinary shares is 5p per ordinary share; 

ii)  the maximum price that may be paid for such shares is, in respect of a share contracted to be purchased on 
any  day,  an  amount  (exclusive  of  all  expenses)  equal  to  105  per  cent  of  the  average  middle  market 
quotations of the ordinary shares of the company as derived from the Daily Official List of the London Stock 
Exchange on the 10 dealing days immediately preceding the day on which the shares are contracted to be 
purchased; 

iii)  the authority hereby conferred shall expire after a period of 18 months from the passing of this resolution 

unless such authority is renewed prior to such expiry; 

iv)  the  authority  hereby  conferred  is  in  substitution  for  any  existing  authority  to  purchase  ordinary  shares 

under the said Section 701; 

v)  the Company may make a contract to purchase ordinary shares under the authority hereby conferred prior 
to the expiry of such authority which will be executed wholly or partly after the expiry of such authority and 
may make a purchase or purchases of ordinary shares in pursuance of any such contract; and 

vi)  the maximum number of ordinary shares hereby authorised to be purchased by the Company does not 
exceed 15 per cent of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company at the date of the passing of this 
resolution.  (Resolution 15) 

BY ORDER OF THE BOARD 

P Haining FCA 
Secretary 
5 August 2022 

Registered office: 2 Ravensbank Business Park, Hedera Road, Redditch, B98 9EY 

126 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
NOTICE OF ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING (continued) 

NOTES: 

Entitlement to attend and vote 

1.  Only those members registered on the Company’s register of members at close of business 2 days before the time 
appointed for the meeting, or if this meeting is adjourned, at close of business on the day two days prior to the 
adjourned meeting shall be entitled to attend and vote at this meeting. 

Attending in person 

2. 

If you wish to attend the meeting in person, please bring photographic identification with you to the meeting. 

Appointment of proxies 

3. 

4. 

If you are a member of the Company at the time set out in note 1 above, you are entitled to appoint a proxy to 
exercise all or any of your rights to attend, speak and vote at the meeting and you should have received a proxy 
form with this notice of meeting.  You can only appoint a proxy using the procedures set out in these notes and 
the notes to the proxy form. 

If you are not a member of the Company but you have been nominated by a member of the  Company to enjoy 
information  rights,  you  do  not  have  a  right  to  appoint  any  proxies  under  the  procedures  set  out  in  this 
“Appointment of proxies” section. 

5.  A proxy does not need to be a member of the Company but must attend the Meeting to represent you.  Details of 
how to appoint the Chairman of the Meeting or another person as your proxy using the proxy form are set out in 
the notes to the proxy form. 

6.  You may appoint more than one proxy provided each proxy is appointed to exercise rights attached to different 

shares.  You may not appoint more than one proxy to exercise rights attached to any one share. 

7.  A vote withheld is not a vote in law, which means that the vote will not be counted in the circulation of votes for 
or against the resolution.  If no voting indication is given, your proxy will vote or abstain from voting at his or her 
discretion. Your proxy will vote (or abstain from voting) as he or she thinks fit in relation to any other matter which 
is put before the Meeting. 

Appointment of proxy using hard copy proxy form 

8.  The notes to the proxy form explain how to direct your proxy how to vote on each resolution or withhold their vote.  
To appoint a proxy using the proxy form, the form must be completed and signed and sent or delivered to Neville 
Registrars Limited, Neville House, Steelpark Road, Halesowen, B62 8HD, not later than 48 hours before the time 
appointed for the Meeting. The completion and return of a form of proxy will not, however, preclude shareholders 
from attending and voting in person at the Meeting. 

In the case of a member which is a company, the proxy form must be executed under its common seal or signed on 
its behalf by an officer of the company or an attorney for the company. 

Any power of attorney or any other authority under which the proxy form is signed (or a duly certified copy of such 
power of authority) must be included with the proxy form. 

Appointment of proxy joint members 

9. 

In  the  case  of  joint  holders,  where  more  than  one  of  the  joint  holders  purports  to  appoint  a  proxy,  only  the 
appointment submitted by the most senior holder will be accepted. Seniority is determined by the order in which 
the names of the joint holders appear in the Company’s register of members in respect of the joint holding (the 
first-named being the most senior). 

127 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTICE OF ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING (continued) 

NOTES: 

Changing proxy instructions 

10.  To change your proxy instructions simply submit a new proxy appointment using the methods set out above.  Note 
that the cut-off time for receipt of proxy appointments (see above) also apply in relation to amended instructions; 
and amended proxy appointment received after the relevant cut-off time will be disregarded. 

Where you have appointed a proxy using the hard-copy proxy form and would like to change the instructions using 
another hard-copy proxy form, please contact Neville Registrars Limited, Neville House, Steelpark Road, Halesowen, 
B62 8HD. 

If you submit more than one valid proxy appointment, the appointment received last before the latest time for the 
receipt of proxies will take precedence. 

Termination of proxy appointments 

11.  In order to revoke a proxy instruction, you will need to inform the Company using one of the following methods: 

a.  By  sending a signed hard copy notice clearly stating your intention to revoke your proxy appoint to Neville 

Registrars Limited, Neville House, Steelpark Road, Halesowen, B62 8HD. 

b. 

In the case of a member which is a company, the revocation notice must be executed under its common seal 
or signed on its behalf by an officer of the company or an attorney for the company.  Any power of attorney or 
any  other  authority  under  which  the  revocation  notice  is signed  (or  a  duly  certified  copy  of  such  power  of 
authority) must be included with the revocation notice. 

In either case, the revocation notice must be received by the Neville Registrars Limited, Neville House, Steelpark 
Road, Halesowen, B62 8HD, not later than 48 hours before the time appointed for the Meeting. 

Appointment  of  a  proxy  does  not  preclude  you  from  attending  the  Meeting  and  voting  in  person.    If  you  have 
appointed a proxy and attend the Meeting in person, your proxy appointment will automatically be terminated. 

Issued shares and total voting rights 

12.  As at 5 August 2022 the Company’s issued share capital comprised of 11,322,394 ordinary shares of 5p each which 
includes 6,946 shares held in treasury.  Each ordinary share carries the right to one vote at a general meeting of the 
Company and, therefore, the total number of voting rights in the Company as at 5 August 2022 is 11,315,448. 

Documents on display 

13.  The following documents will be available for inspection at the place of the Annual General Meeting prior to the 

meeting until the time of the Meeting and for at least 15 minutes prior to the meeting: 

a.  The register of Directors’ interests in the share capital and debentures of the Company; and  

b.  Copies of service agreements under which Directors of the Company are employed 

c.  The full rules of the LTIP 

d.  The full rules of the CSOP  

e.  Copies of the new Articles of Association of Solid State PLC Company No 00771335. 

128 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
129